JP6641188B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result on the variable display unit, a predetermined game value is provided. Is provided to the player.

  Note that the game value is a right to make the state of the variable prize ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine advantageous for a player who is likely to win a hit ball, or to be in a state advantageous for the player. Or a condition in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display unit based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easily won. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Also, in the variable display unit, a symbol other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time and stops, swings, There is a possibility that a big hit may occur before the final result is displayed due to the state where it is enlarged or reduced, or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a continuous state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. The reach state and the state thereof are referred to as a reach mode. Further, a variable display including a reach effect is called a reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, the result is “missing” and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Generally, when a game ball starts and wins in a starting winning opening provided in a game area, this type of gaming machine immediately determines whether or not to make a big hit or reach based on the starting winning. Instead, each random number value is read at the timing when it becomes possible to start the variable display based on the start winning, and it is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or to reach.

  On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, before executing the fluctuation display based on the establishment of the starting condition (start winning), each random number value is read in advance and it is determined whether or not a specific display result is obtained, and a suggestion effect is performed. Some are configured to do so. For example, in Patent Literature 1, it is determined in advance whether or not a big hit will occur at the timing of a start winning prize, and a hold display is displayed in a different form such as a present box or a bomb at the timing of a start winning prize, At the timing when the memory is digested and the hold display is shifted, the display mode of the hold display is changed to a form in which an object appears from the present box or by changing from a bomb to a peach. (Notification effect) is described. Patent Literature 1 describes executing a notice effect for notifying that the possibility of a big hit or reach is high, such as a notice before the occurrence of reach.

JP 2011-182819 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, if a hold memory occurs during the execution of the notice effect, the suggestion effect is executed in parallel with the notice effect, so that the player's attention to the notice effect is reduced. There is a possibility that it will decrease.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the execution frequency of a suggested effect while maintaining a degree of attention to a notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the claims of the present application is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and stores information related to variable display as a temporary storage. A storage means for executing a look-ahead preview effect of notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state in response to the variable display based on the hold storage in a variable display performed prior to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage; A possible pre-reading notice effect executing means, and an information effect for notifying in the variable display whether or not the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display can be executed, and a first information effect as the information effect. If, suggesting effect suggesting a possible notification effect execution means executes the expected high degree of second notification effect which is also controlled by the advantageous condition than the first notification effect, that the second notification effect is performed And viable suggesting demonstration execution means includes a hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to pending memory, the previous SL suggested demonstration execution means, whether or not the second notification effect is performed When the suggestion effect is executed and when the suggestion effect is not executed, there is a case where the hold display means does not execute the non-display control of the hold display when the first notification effect is executed, If the second notification effect is performed, executing a non-display control of hold display, when the second notification effect without the suggestion effect is performed is executed, with the start of the second notification effect pending When the second notification effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed, the display is controlled to be non-display control, and the hold display is controlled at the end of the second notification effect. Controlling the display non-display, and the second notification effect Display control of the hold display with the end, if the second notification effect is not executed after the suggestion effect has been executed, non-display control of the hold display with the start of the suggestion effect, with the end of the suggestion effect Display control of the hold display, the look-ahead notice effect performing means, for a new hold storage stored during execution of the non-display control, the look-ahead notice effect during the variable display in which the non-display control is executed Without performing, the prefetch notice effect can be executed in a variable display executed after the end of the variable display in which the non-display control is executed, and the prefetch notice effect is executed after the end of the variable display in which the non-display control is executed. If you are supposed to run in when controlled to the advantageous state before execution of the distal reading announcement attraction, it does not execute the prediction effect reading tip, characterized by a crotch.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the suggested effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the notice effect, and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention provides a specific game which is advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived on a variable display means for performing a variable display and deriving a display result. A holding machine (for example, a first holding storage buffer, a second holding storage buffer) for storing a variable display that has not been started yet as a holding storage, the gaming machine being controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A pre-start determination unit (for example, a part that executes steps S1217A and S1217B in the game control microcomputer 560) to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a specific display result before the start of the variable display; Based on the judgment result of the pre-start judging means, a specific timing (for example, a timing at which a start winning prize has occurred, and a hold At the timing of shifting the hold display), the suggestion effect execution means (for example, a suggestion effect (for example, a hold notice effect)) that executes a suggestion effect (for example, a hold notice effect) in the variable display that is started before the variable display targeted for the determination is executed. (Steps for executing steps S6011, S6012 in effect control microcomputer 100) and starting to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be the specific display result based on the hold storage when the variable display is started. Time determining means, and a plurality of announcement effects (for example, a predetermined effect, a step-up announcement effect, etc.) at a plurality of timings from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result. And mini-character announcement effect, movable object notice effect, production blade notice effect effect, notice operation performed from timing t1 to timing t4 ) Can be executed (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, step S8105 is executed in accordance with a portion for executing the predetermined effect process of step S800A or process data corresponding to the effect effect selected in step S8004). Part, a part where a preview effect is executed from timing t1 to a timing t4), whether or not a notice effect is executed by the notice effect execution means, and a notice at any one of a plurality of timings when executing the notice effect. Notice effect determining means for determining whether to execute the effect (portion for selecting the form of the notice effect at each of the timings t1 to t4), and the notice effect performing means includes a predetermined first timing of the plurality of timings. , It is possible to obtain specific display results corresponding to different rendering modes Any one of a plurality of first announcement effects (specific sound effects at timing t1, special sound effects) at different levels of sex, and at a second timing later than the first timing among the plurality of timings Any of a plurality of second preview effects (normal cut-in image at timing t4, special cut-in image) having different levels of the possibility of a specific display result corresponding to different effect modes can be executed. The notice effect determining means determines that the start-time determining means determines the specific display result, and the specific effect mode that is likely to be the specific display result among the plurality of first notice effects at the first timing. When the first announcement effect is executed, the second announcement effect of the normal effect mode in which the possibility of a specific display result among the plurality of second announcement effects at the second timing is lower than the specific effect mode is performed. Is determined or determined so as to be easily executed (when the specific sound effect at timing t1 is executed, the jackpot is set at 50% after timing t2). And a suggestion effect execution means that, at a specific timing, the notice effect (for example, a predetermined effect, a movable object notice effect) of the notice effects during the variable display by the notice effect execution means. When it is being executed, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines “Y” in step S6000, the suspension notice effect process (1) ends without shifting to the process after step S6001. I do. Also, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is characterized in that when Y is determined in step S6005, the process does not shift to the process of step S6008 and thereafter, and does not start the suspension notice effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the suggested effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the notice effect, and to improve the interest in the game. Note that "restricting a suggested effect" means that no setting of a suggested effect is made for a hold memory corresponding to a start winning prize (passing of a game medium to a start area) generated within a limited period of the suggested effect. This includes both the concept of not performing the suggestion effect and the concept of delaying the start timing of the suggestion effect. Furthermore, the concept of "restricting suggestive effects" includes prohibiting retroactive execution of suggestive effects on hold memories corresponding to hold displays that are currently being displayed, and the timing of starting suggestive effects. It also includes delaying.

(Means 2) In the means 1, as a variable display means, a condition for starting variable display is established after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a first start area (for example, a first start winning opening 13) ( For example, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed based on the fact that neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has been executed and that it is not in the big hit game state. The first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) for starting and deriving and displaying the display result, and the variable display after the game medium passes through the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening 14). The variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) which starts the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the establishment of the start condition of the second symbol, and derives and displays the display result. ) And the second knowledge The variable display of the information is executed prior to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, by performing steps S52 to S54 in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized). A game machine to be executed), in which a first state in which the game medium easily passes through the second start area (for example, an open state of the variable winning ball device 15), and in which the game medium is less likely to pass than in the first state. The start area control means (for example, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened in the ordinary symbol process in step S27 in the game control microcomputer 560) which can be controlled to the second state (for example, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is closed). And a part for controlling to a closed state), and the notice effect performing means notifies that the second starting area is controlled to the first state as the notice effect. Announcement attraction (e.g., a predetermined effect) that the execution (e.g., partial executes step S800A in effect control microcomputer 100) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state in which the storage in which the game medium has passed in the first start area and the possibility of the specific game state being stocked is stored. It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the notice effect performing means executes a notice effect (for example, a movable object notice effect) for moving a movable member (for example, the movable member 78) as the notice effect (for example, an effect). The control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step S8105 according to the process data corresponding to the movable object announcement effect selected in step S8004). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the attention degree of the movable member from being lowered, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the pre-start judging means sets the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14) to a game medium (for example, a game ball). Is passed, a determination is made as to whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1217A and S1217B), The suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the notice effect if the notice effect is being performed when the pre-start determination means determines whether the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result. After completion of the process, a suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, the hold memory is exhausted and the hold display is shifted) (for example, a microcontroller for effect control). When determining “Y” in step S6000 or determining “Y” in step S6005, the computer 100 executes steps S6513 and S6514 to start the hold announcement effect at the timing of exhausting the hold memory (shifting the hold display). ). According to such a configuration, by delaying the execution timing of the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the suggestion effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14). And a notice effect determining means (for example, a part for executing step S6000 and S6005 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment) for judging whether or not the notice effect is being executed. The determining means determines that a specific condition is satisfied after the notice effect is completed when the notice effect determination means determines that a notice effect (for example, a predetermined effect, a movable object notice effect) among the notice effects is being performed. (E.g., the hold display has been shifted and the hold display has been shifted) to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result. (For example, in the second embodiment, when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S6000 or determines Y in step S6005, the hold memory is digested (shift the hold display). ), The step S6510a is executed to perform the prefetch determination). According to such a configuration, by delaying the determination timing by the pre-start determination unit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the suggested effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

(Means 6) In another mode of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a variable display is provided after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14). Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (for example, neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor the state of the big hit game), a plurality of types of each of which can be identified Variable display means (for example, first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b) for variably displaying identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol, effect symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result. , Effect display device 9), and when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display means, a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. control The variable display of the identification information for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area, includes predetermined information (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, Holding means (for example, a first holding storage buffer and a second holding storage buffer) for storing a random number) as a holding memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4); Pre-start determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps S1217A and S1217B in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result based on the information; Based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, a specific timing (for example, a timing at which a start winning prize is generated, a hold memory is exhausted, and a hold display is displayed. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control) for executing a suggestion effect (for example, a hold notice effect) in a variable display started before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination is executed at the timing of performing the determination. Effect execution means for executing a reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the step S8004 is selected). (Step S8105 is executed in accordance with the process data according to the fluctuation pattern including the reach) and the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined information read from the holding storage means when the variable display of the identification information is started. Whether to display the specified result as a specific display result And a plurality of announcement effects (e.g., a plurality of announcement effects for announcing the possibility of a specific display state at a plurality of timings from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation of the display result). Notice effect execution means (for example, effect control) that can execute a predetermined effect, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect blade effect notice effect, or a notice effect performed from timing t1 to timing t4). In the microcomputer 100, a part for executing the predetermined effect processing in step S800A, a part for executing step S8105 in accordance with the process data corresponding to the notice effect selected in step S8004, and a part for executing the notice effect from timing t1 to timing t4 ) And whether or not to execute the notice effect by the notice effect execution means Notification effect determining means (a portion for selecting a mode of the notification effect at each of the timing t1 to the timing t4) for determining the notification effect to be executed at a plurality of timings when the notification effect is executed. A plurality of first preview effects (specific sound effects and special sound effects at timing t1) having different stages of the possibility of a specific display result corresponding to different effect modes at predetermined first timings among the timings. Can be executed, and at a second timing that is later than the first timing among the plurality of timings, a plurality of stages having different levels of the possibility of a specific display result corresponding to different rendering modes are provided. Any of the second notice effect (the normal cut-in image and the special cut-in image at the timing t4) can be executed, and the notice effect determining means is determined in advance. The stage has determined that the specific display result is to be obtained, and the first timing corresponds to the first specific stage in which the possibility of the specific display result among the plurality of first announcement effects is higher than the first normal stage at the first timing. When the first announcement effect of the specific effect mode is executed, the second timing corresponds to a second normal stage in which the possibility of a specific display result among a plurality of second announcement effects at the second timing is lower than the second specific stage. The announcement effect to be executed at a plurality of timings is determined so that the second ordinary announcement effect of the ordinary effect mode is executed or is easily executed (when the specific sound effect at the timing t1 is executed, The part that restricts the announcement effect in a mode of a big hit at a rate of 50% after t2), and the suggestion effect execution means at a specific timing by the reach effect execution means during the variable display of the identification information. If a specific reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step This is characterized in that the hold announcement effect process (1) is ended without shifting to the process after S6001). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the suggestion effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. In this embodiment, "restricting the suggested effect" means that the holding memory corresponding to the start winning (the passing of the game medium to the starting area) generated within the limited period of the suggested effect is completely suggested. The concept includes both a concept in which the effect is not set and the suggested effect is not performed, and a concept in which the start timing of the suggested effect is delayed. Furthermore, the concept of "restricting suggestive effects" includes prohibiting retroactive execution of suggestive effects on hold memories corresponding to hold displays that are currently being displayed, and the timing of starting suggestive effects. It also includes delaying.

(Means 7) In the means 6, the reach effect execution means includes, as a specific reach effect, a reach effect (for example, involving movement of the movable member 78 in a mode shown in FIG. 53) involving the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable member 78). (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the step S8105 in accordance with the process data corresponding to the variation pattern including the super reach effect selected in the step S8004). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the attention degree of the movable member from being lowered, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 8) In the means 6 or 7, the pre-start judging means determines that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1217A and S1217B), and the suggestion effect execution means When the specific reach effect is being executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is determined to be the specific display result by the pre-start determination means, after the specific reach effect has been completed, The suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the hold display is exhausted and the hold display is shifted) (for example, a microcontroller for effect control). The data 100 may be configured to execute the steps S6513 and S6514 to start the hold announcement effect at the timing of canceling the hold memory (shifting the hold display) when Y is determined in the step S6000). . According to such a configuration, by delaying the execution timing of the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the execution frequency of the suggestion effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means 9) In the means 6 or 7, based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14), a reach effect is provided. A reach effect determining means (for example, a part for executing step S6000 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the process is executed; If it is determined by the means that the specific reach effect of the reach effects has been executed, the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the specific reach effect (for example, the hold display is digested to shift the hold display. Is determined on the basis of the fact that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result (for example, in the second embodiment, The effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the step S6510a to perform the pre-reading determination at the timing when the hold storage is consumed (shift the hold display) when the determination of Y is made in step S6000). Good. According to such a configuration, by delaying the determination timing by the before-start determination unit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the frequency of execution of the suggestion effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. it can.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, a game control means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control) for controlling the progress of the game, and variable identification information based on information from the game control means. Effect control means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100) for executing an effect corresponding to the display (e.g., effect symbol change display), and the game control means includes: A reserved storage information transmitting means (for example, step S1220A in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting reserved storage information capable of specifying the number (for example, a first reserved storage number addition designation command, a second reserved storage number addition designation command). S1220B executing portion) and determination result information (for example, symbol designation Command, variation category command), and a determination result information transmitting means (for example, a part for executing steps S1218A, S1219A, S1218B, S1219B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means includes at least Alternatively, when any one of the determination result information cannot be normally received, a suggestion effect limiting unit that limits execution of the suggestion effect (for example, when N is determined in step S6003 in the effect control microcomputer 100, In the case of N in step S6004, the process may not include the processing of step S6008 and the subsequent steps, and the suspension notice effect may not be started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggested effect from being erroneously executed based on the determination result of the pre-start determination unit, and to prevent a decrease in the reliability of the suggested effect.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 1 to 10, the suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect by prohibiting the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 holds The announcement effect (2) (refer to steps S660C and S662C) may not be provided, and the reserved announcement effect may not be executed retrospectively. According to such a configuration, by completely prohibiting the execution of the suggested effect, it is possible to give attention to the notice effect and the specific reach effect, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing the example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the example of a circuit structure of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a CPU on a main board. It is a flowchart which shows a 4ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol prepared beforehand. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern type determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type for outliers. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a design specification command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a command storage area at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect process (2). It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows hold display return processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode when the suspension notice production is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode when the suspension notice production is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode when the suspension notice production is restricted. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the suspension notice production process (1) in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the suspension notice production process (2) in a 2nd embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine in 3rd Embodiment from the front. FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing a state where the glass door frame is opened in the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 59. It is an explanatory view for explaining a movable mode of a movable LED unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a movable mode of a push button. It is a flow chart which shows a suspension notice production process (1) in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a suspension notice production process (2) in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a suspension notice production process (2) in a 4th embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (game components to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing hitting balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the board and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 constituted by a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for effecting variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. The effect symbol display area has a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, a symbol other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol becomes the same symbol). (Combination of symbols), stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed, or multiple symbols fluctuated synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of displayed symbols were switched. An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. The reach state and the state thereof are referred to as a reach mode. Further, a variable display including a reach effect is called a reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, the result is “missing” and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9 is described. However, the effects performed by the effect display device 9 are the same as those described in this embodiment. Instead, for example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect of displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the big hit determination or the variation pattern may be executed. For example, while performing a professional wrestling or soccer game or a battle effect where enemy and ally characters fight, a performance that wins the game or battle if it is a big hit, and a performance that defeats the game or battle if it is out of place Is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying a result such as a win or loss, an effect of sequentially developing a predetermined story such as a story may be executed.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for a first special symbol, in which a fourth symbol for a first special symbol is displayed in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol, which will be described later, A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the effect design change display is executed in synchronization with the special design change display (exactly, however, the effect design change display is changed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect contents including the change display of the effect symbol disappear from the screen for a moment. The production mode has been diversified, for example, the production is performed, and the production is performed such that the movable object blocks all or a part of the screen. For this reason, even if the user is looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the state of the fourth symbol is checked to determine whether the current state is the variable display. Whether or not it is possible to recognize it. Note that the fourth symbol is constantly displayed in a variably manner with a fixed operation, and does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are sometimes referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  The fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals with a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that "variable display is synchronized" means that the variable display starts and ends at the same time and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a display color (a display color different from a loss. For example, a color of a loss) in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but in the case of a big hit, it is displayed in red.If the display color is different depending on the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 2R certain big hit) When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (A display color different from a loss. For example, a blue color is displayed at the time of a loss, and a red color is displayed at the time of a big hit. The display color may be made different depending on whether it is a 5R probability change hit, a 10R probability change hit, or a 2R probability change hit.) Note that the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from disappearing after being turned off and being assimilated with the background image.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. To realize the fourth symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be configured to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed depending on whether or not it has been displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbol may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light-emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, by performing a display in which display of different display colors is repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed separately. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, by performing a display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at different time intervals, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed separately. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used when deriving and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and when deriving and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, a stop symbol in a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in a lower portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a predetermined effect execution area 9F for executing a predetermined effect described later is provided.

  On the lower left side of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display section) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display section) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). May be.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of storages to be held is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) This is started based on the establishment of a state and a state in which the big hit game is not executed), and after a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through an area that is previously determined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the game ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. It is. Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easily performed), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, game balls are more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state, a game ball heading for the variable prize ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9. However, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. 13 and the arrangement of nails around the first starting winning opening 13 makes it difficult for the game balls to be guided to the first starting winning opening 13, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is reduced. May be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning port 14 is provided. A configuration in which a variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the starting winning ports 14 may be provided.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective prize balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as a starting memory or a starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second number of hold storages. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  At the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display section 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display section 9b for displaying the second hold storage number are provided. I have. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are individually displayed, but the sum of the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is shown. You may comprise so that the total suspended storage display part which displays the suspended storage number may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the first holding memory and the second holding memory are displayed side by side in the winning order in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 in the combined holding storage display unit. Is displayed in a manner that allows the user to recognize whether the storage is the first storage or the second storage (for example, the first storage is displayed in red and the second storage is displayed in blue). You may comprise.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The effect symbol as the symbol is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the user of the big hit. Is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, a game control microcomputer 560 for controlling the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command capable of specifying a change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, if data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side are compared. A gap may occur between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, a situation may occur in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol are not completely synchronized.

  A movable member 78 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moved when the motor 86 rotates is provided on the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9 on the left side. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super-reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 78 may be operated in, for example, a pseudo-rendition effect without being limited to the movable object announcement effect and the super reach effect.

  In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter, referred to as effect blade member) attached to a rotating shaft of a motor 87 and moved when the motor 87 rotates, below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. For example, the stage effectors 79a and 79b operate when a notice effect (stage effect notice announcement effect) is executed. It should be noted that the production blade role objects 79a and 79b may be operated in, for example, a pseudo-rendition production or a super-reach production, without being limited to the production feather role announcement notice production.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

The game board 6 is also provided with winning ports (normal winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on the winning of the game balls. The gaming balls that have won the winning openings 29, 30, 33, and 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a.

  On the right side of the game board 6, a normal symbol display 10 is provided. The ordinary symbol display device 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “O” and “X”) called ordinary symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols become visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the player is in a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which game balls can enter the second starting winning port 14). Changes to In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, there is provided an ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 41 normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is decreased by one. Furthermore, a high-probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that of a normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of a special symbol change display is increased compared to the normal state) However, except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 will hit the symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened are increased. .

  At the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 which are blinkingly displayed during the game, and at the bottom there is an out opening 26 for taking in a hit ball which has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the right and left upper sides outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on a front frame is provided.

  An operation button 120 as an operation means operable by a player is provided in a member constituting the hit ball supply tray 3. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows a player to perform a pressing operation. In addition, the operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning port 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the game is shifted to a so-called probable change state after the big hit game ends, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, the special symbol display). (The execution conditions of the variable display in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). In the case of the high base state, for example, as compared with the case of not being in the high base state, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended. It is easy to win the starting prize. In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the game is always shifted to the probable change state. Machine may be configured. In this case, the state may be shifted to the high base state even in the time saving state.

  Note that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display device 10 shifts to the ordinary symbol probable state in which the probability that the stopped symbol hits the symbol is increased. This may cause a transition to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probable state, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 hits the symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened is increased. Therefore, if the state is shifted to the normal symbol change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which starting winning is easy (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a positive variation symbol, and the like, from the disadvantageous state for the player. The state changes to an advantageous state (a state in which the starting winning is easy). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that also includes changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is shortened, the normal symbol may be shifted to the high base state. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of the normal symbol hitting increases. Accordingly, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened increases, and the winning prize ball device 15 becomes easy to win (high base state).

  Also, by shifting to the time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol starts. This increases the frequency (in other words, the speed of the storage of the hold memory becomes faster), and it is possible to reduce a situation in which an invalid start winning is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is more likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is played increases.

  Further, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to start winning (transition to the high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (extended open state, normal symbol positive change state, normal symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-described states (open extended state, normal symbol probable state, normal symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it is easy to win a start (high). (Transition to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing a control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 56 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be externally or internally incorporated. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a built-in random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by hardware circuits).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by a power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, and hence, the execution (or processing) of the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) is hereinafter referred to. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set updating rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted), the digital camera has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a function of selecting and setting an update range of numerical data (a function of selecting and setting an initial value and a function of selecting and setting an upper limit), a function of selecting and setting a rule for updating numerical data, and a method of selecting a rule for updating numerical data. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that supplies detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the starting port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. I have. The main board also has an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a special winning opening, according to a command from the microcomputer 560 for game control. 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol holding storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls display of the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The control of the sound output from the speaker 27 via the sound output board 70 is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, a microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information about effects such as effect symbol process flags. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the power of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal (input from the main board 31 via the relay board 77). An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM previously stores character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of persons, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in accordance with a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows a signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in a direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass a signal in a direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) as a signal direction regulating means. Is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. In addition, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, so that the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 via the output port 106 to operate the movable member 78. The effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 via the output port 106 to operate the effect blade parts 79a and 79b.

  The effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. The effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving an LED or a lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitting body provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, a current is supplied to the decorative LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs the generated voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The sound data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a group of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined time period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of a reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process from step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After the initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) as built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, it is checked whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the processing at the time of power supply stop has been performed, the CPU 56 checks data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the initialization processing executed at the time of turning on the power and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 returns the game state restoring process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The part which should not be initialized includes, for example, data indicating a game state before the power supply is stopped (a special symbol process flag, a high probability flag, a high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is stored (output Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 sends a display result designation command to the effect control board 80 which designates a display result (15R probability change hit, 10R probability change hit, 2R probability change hit, sudden probability change hit, small hit, or miss) stored in the backup RAM. The transmission is performed (step S44). Then, control goes to a step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the stored variable time timer is resumed, and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted. When the value of the fluctuating time timer has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the special symbol process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always transmitting the display result designation command at the time of restoration from power failure, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. . If the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not the state and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that it is not in the middle and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, one of the backup flag and the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag, is initialized. The value is set.

  The CPU 56 also issues an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs an initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (Steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Step S17) and the initial value random number update process (Step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game display device, a variable prize ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden change big hit, the sudden change sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) without reaching the reach. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. I do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually controls the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not the power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, upon detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of the signals are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, a second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). The first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the ordinary symbol display 10 output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the ordinary symbol process process of step S27, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 to derive and display the variation display result, or the variation display result of the ordinary symbol Is executed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, in response to the detection of a winning based on the turning-on of one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23, the payout control microcircuit mounted on the payout control board 37. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“O” and “X”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag relating to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set. At such a speed, the display control data value set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “「 ”and 0 indicating“ x ”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. Note that the game control processing corresponds to the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. May be executed.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There is a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach the reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally non-reachable”) variable display mode in a case where the variable display result is a lost symbol.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not ultimately become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lost”) when the variable display result is “losed”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed. In some cases, a suddenly changing big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is suddenly stopped and displayed without reaching the reach.

  When the small hit "5" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is "Suddenly probable big hit". After the effect symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probable variable big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol “5” on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small hit is a hit which is permitted up to a smaller number of times of opening of the special winning opening compared to the big hit (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second). Note that when the small hitting game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probable state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probable state. Further, the sudden change big hit means that the number of times the big winning opening is released is allowed to be small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening of 0.1 seconds is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit and a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the positive change state (that is, by doing so, the player suddenly appears to be in the positive change state) Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By performing such control, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so that the player has a high probability state. (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in this embodiment, in the case where the jackpot types are all set to the probable big hit (in this embodiment, 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, sudden probable big hit), It is not necessary to provide it. In the case where the small hits are all set to the small hits when the type of the big hits is the probable big hits, it is preferable to provide the sudden change big hits which are only shifted to the high probability state and do not accompany the high base state. . However, in this embodiment, as described later, the ratio of super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden change probability big hit which becomes a high probability / low base state, a sudden change change big hit is terminated, and after the change display of the 71st rotation is completed, a high probability change is displayed in all the change displays. / Low base state, so that the super-reach ratio in all the fluctuation displays until the probable change state ends is increased. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability changing jackpot that becomes a high probability / low base state, the super reach ratio is not always increased when the high probability / low base state is established, but becomes a super reach. A case where the ratio is increased and a case where the ratio is not increased (the normal ratio is maintained) may be provided. Also, for example, instead of looking at the game state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of variable display after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variable display is performed. Only at times, the ratio of super reach may be increased. With such a configuration, in the case where a sudden probability changing big hit that becomes the high probability / low base state is provided, the super reach is displayed in each fluctuation display after the big hit game by the sudden probability changing big hit is completed and until the probability changing state ends. It is possible to prevent the appearance rate from continuously increasing.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 to the non-reach PA1-1 to the non-reach A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, and fluctuation patterns of super PB3-1 to super PB3-2. As shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 that is used when no reach is performed and involves the effect of a pseudo-ream is performed once again. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-2 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-1 to the super PA3-2 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the re-variation is to re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once out of the range from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3, the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are the fluctuation patterns used when suddenly changing large hits or small hits. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and produce a pseudo-run effect, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-4 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-3 to the super PA3-4 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run is re-changed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of the reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo run, the fluctuation time is 32). .75 seconds and the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds in the case of the super reach A without the pseudo run.) For example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, Alternatively, the fluctuating time may be varied according to the total number of storages to be suspended. For example, even in the case where the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storages increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the super reach of the same type, when performing the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating time may be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When performing the fluctuation display of the two special symbols, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the second number of reserved storages. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each of the values of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, a fluctuation pattern type determination table for the reserved storage numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern type determination table is prepared in advance), and a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first number of retained storages or the second number of retained storages, to vary the variation time.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 10R certain big hit, 2R certain big hit, sudden certain big hit) (for big hit type determination). (2) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the variation pattern type). (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determines a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the variation pattern type, and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) to determine the variation pattern. One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach A, and a fluctuation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into a variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of times of re-change of the pseudo run, and a change pattern type including a change pattern without pseudo run, a change pattern type including a change pattern of one re-run, A variation pattern type including a variation pattern with two fluctuations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with three re-variations may be used. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped based on the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-run or a sliding effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a 15R probability change hit, a 10R probability change hit, and a 2R probability change hit, a normal CA3-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern involving only a normal reach, a normal reach, And a normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-run, and a super CA3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type with a super reach. In the case of a sudden change big hit, a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a reach and a special CA4-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a reach are classified. ing. In the case of a small hit, the type is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. In the case of a loss, a non-reach CA 2-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a reach or a specific effect, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a reach but with a specific effect are included. The non-reach CA 2-2, the non-reach CA 2-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations without a reach or a specific effect, and the normal CA 2-4 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern only with a normal reach. And a normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo reach of two times of normal reach and re-variation, and a normal CA2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo run of one re-performation -6 and Super CA2-7, which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the large hit type determination random number (1) and the normal symbol hit random number (4) are generated by the counter. Count up (1 addition). That is, these are the random numbers for determination, and the other random numbers are the random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or the random numbers for initial value (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above-described random numbers may be used in order to enhance the gaming effect. Also, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the big hit determination random number. Note that a software random number may be used as the big hit determination random number instead of the hardware random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probable change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probable change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the big hit determination value.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change state is a state in which the state is shifted to the high probability state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit in the jackpot lottery is increased, and the state is also shifted to the high base state. There are two cases: a state in which the state is shifted to only the probability state and the state is not shifted to the high base state (the state is a low base state). , A probability change big hit determination table is used, and in other cases, a normal time big hit determination table is used. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the game is shifted to the high probability state and the high base state after the big hit game ends. Then, after the end of the big hit, the probable change state continues until the change display ends 71 times. However, the high base state ends when the variable display ends 70 times after the big hit, and shifts to the low base state, and is continued only in the high probability state until the variable display ends 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit is completed, from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display, only the high probability state is shifted to the high base state. There is a case in which there is no (low base state) probability change state.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variation display of the second special symbol. (For second special symbol). Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and is set in FIG. 8C for the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are the small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the certain change state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probable change state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to perform an effect that stimulates whether or not the probable change occurs, even if the current game state is the probable change state, On the contrary, it makes the player feel troublesome. Therefore, if the small hit is not generated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the gaming state is in the probable change state, and the stir effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. Can be prevented, and a situation in which the player feels troublesome can be prevented.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number (random R) for jackpot determination. The random number value for jackpot determination is shown in FIG. If any one of the jackpot determination values is matched, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (15R probability variable hit, 10R probability variable hit, 2R probability variable hit, sudden probability variable hit). When the random number for big hit determination matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that a small hit is to be made for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined as “small hit” is higher.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8 (D) determines the type of the big hit using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. FIG. 8E shows a case where the big hit type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for a second special symbol) 131b.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit is set to "15R certain variable big hit" based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination. This is a table that is referred to for determining one of “10R probability variable hit”, “2R probability variable hit”, and “sudden probability variable hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In contrast, two determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b (ratio of 2/40). Will be suddenly determined as a jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined to be “suddenly variable jackpot” is higher. In addition, "sudden probability change big hit" is allocated only to the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability change big hit" is not allocated to the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (ie, Only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the "suddenly probable big hit" may be determined.)

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and (E), a suddenly probable big hit as a first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is provided, and an amount larger than the game value. As the second specific game state that grants the game value, there is a case where the 15 round probable big hit “15R probable big hit”, the 10 round probable big hit “10R probable big hit” and the 2 round probable big hit “2R probable big hit” may be determined. In addition, there is shown a case where it is determined that the first specific game state is set at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited to this. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the special winning opening per round is increased as a game value is determined. Is also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, a second specific game state may be determined in which the opening time of the special winning opening per game during the big hit is extended as a game value. Further, for example, even in the same 15 rounds of big hits, a first specific game state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and a second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened plural times per round are set. It may be prepared to increase the game value in the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds are opened). Is terminated, and in the case of the second specific game state, unfinished rounds remain), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to stimulate whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all the 15 rounds have been internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, an uncompleted round remains internally. For this reason, the big hit game may be continued (an effect in which the opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after the big hit of opening 15 times is completed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and (E), the big hit types include “15R certain variable big hit”, “10R certain variable big hit”, “2R certain variable big hit”, and “sudden positive variable big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is three, that is, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is It is not limited to the form shown. For example, a 7R certain-variable big hit that controls a 7-round big hit game and a 5R certain-variable big hit that controls a 5-round big hit game may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot types are four types of "15R probability variable hit", "10R probability variable hit", "2R probability variable hit" and "sudden probability variable hit" is shown, but only four types are possible. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpots may be provided. Conversely, the number of big hit types may be less than four, for example, only two big hit types may be provided.

  The “15R probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probable big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 10 rounds and the game is shifted to the probable change state after the big hit game state is completed. The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probable big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds, and the game is shifted to the probable change state after the big hit game state ends (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the high probability state and the high base state). The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  Note that the “2R probable big hit” is a big hit in which only two (two rounds) opening of the special winning opening is allowed, similar to the “sudden probable big hit” to be described later. The opening time of the special winning opening per round is long (29 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in the case of the "suddenly changing big hit" described later, it is hardly expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the jackpot game.

  Also, the “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times the large winning opening is opened less than “15R probability change big hit” or “10R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second). It is a permissible jackpot. In other words, when "suddenly changing probability big hit" is achieved, the state is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state. In addition, the opening time of the big winning prize per round is as long as 29 seconds in "15R probability changing big hit", "10R probability changing big hit", and "2R probability changing big hit", while "sudden probability changing big hit" is one round. The opening time of the big winning opening per hit is as short as 0.1 second, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win in the big winning opening during the big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability change state after the sudden change probability jackpot game state ends (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the high probability state and also to the high base state. Steps described later). S166 to S169). Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when the "small hit" occurs, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by the "sudden probability change big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained after the opening of the special winning opening twice. By doing so, it is impossible to recognize whether it is "suddenly changing big hit" or "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as shown in this embodiment, in the case where the jackpot types are all set to the probable big hit (in this embodiment, 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, sudden probable big hit), It is not necessary to provide it. Further, in the case where a small hit is provided when all of the big hit types are probable big hits as in this embodiment, a sudden probable big hit which is only shifted to the high probability state and does not accompany the high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide them (the opening pattern of the special winning opening is also the same in the case of the sudden change big hit and the small hit). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach is increased when performing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, but suddenly without the small hit and the high base state. In the configuration in which the probability variable jackpot is provided, the ratio of the super reach is not always increased in the 71st fluctuation display, but the ratio of the super reach is increased and not increased (the normal ratio is maintained). In the high probability state after the sudden change big hit, the variation pattern may be selected by the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and correspond to "15R probable big hit", "10R probable big hit", "2R probable big hit", and "sudden probable big hit". The determined determination value (big hit type determination value) is set. When the value of Random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the large hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C are used to determine the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be a large hit symbol, and to provide a random number for the variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of a plurality of types based on (random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of the super CA3-3, the special CA4-1, and the special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, in the case of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the jackpot type is “10R probability variable jackpot” or “2R probability variable jackpot”, and when the jackpot type is “15R probability variable jackpot” The assignment of the determination value to the variation pattern types of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3 differs between the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when comparing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Further, a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern type according to the big hit type. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the jackpot type, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B), in this embodiment, in the case of “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit”, or “2R probable big hit”, the variation pattern type determination is performed. If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be understood that the variable display accompanied by at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type with pseudo run (variable pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and the fluctuation pattern type without pseudo run (super PB3-3, super (Variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4). In this case, in both the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for the 10R / 2R probability variable big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for the 15R probability variable big hit, the variation pattern type with super In addition, a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a pseudo run is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit types such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, if the variable display result is controlled to be the "big hit" and the big hit type is "suddenly changing big hit", the state is suddenly changed to the big hitting state. It is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from the case of controlling.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D displays a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to to determine one of the following. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), a case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type when the small hit is determined. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Of these, FIG. 10A shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern for a loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit to the end of the 70th variation display) among the probability variation states. The type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 10 (D) shows the high probability / low base state of the gaming state in which the gaming state is the probability changing state (the state from the end of the big hit to the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display). Shows a deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D used in the case of. The outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D include a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an outlier symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine one of the following.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D), in this embodiment, even if it is in the probable change state, when the last 71st fluctuation display is performed after the end of the big hit, it is before that. As compared with the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the variation pattern with super reach is selected at a higher rate. By doing so, in the present embodiment, in the last fluctuation display at which the probable change state ends, the super reach fluctuation display is performed with a high probability. Improving the feeling. It should be noted that not only the last 71st variation display, but also, for example, to increase the ratio of super-reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the end of the probable change state (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, The super reach variation display may be performed with a high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big hit, the high probability state is continued until the 71st fluctuation display ends, and the high base state is continued until the 70th fluctuation display ends. Thus, in the last 71st variation display of the probable change state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high variation state is continued until the 71st variation display ends. Alternatively, the control may be controlled to the high probability / high base state even in the last 71st variation display of the probability variation state. However, with such control, in this embodiment, as described later, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for out-of-course are selected in the variation pattern setting process depending on the state of the high probability flag and the high base flag. (Refer to steps S95, S96, S100, and S101), since the high-probability / high-base state is maintained even in the last 71st fluctuation display of the probable state, the state of the flag is checked in this way, and The change pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D cannot be selected. Therefore, when controlling to the high probability / high base state also in the 71st variation display at the end of the probable change state, the values of the high probability number counter and the high base number counter described later are checked, and the value of the counter is checked. If the remaining number is one, the variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135C is selected. Good.

  Further, in a case where the ratio of the super reach is increased from the variable display a predetermined number of times before the probable change state ends (for example, five times before) to the last variable display, for example, a high probability The counter or the high base number counter is set to 75 times (for example, 75 is set to both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter, and the high probability / high base state is set until the variable display of 75 times is completed). May be continued, a high probability number counter is set to 75, a high base number counter is set to 70, and the high probability / low level is set from 5 fluctuations before the end of the probable change state to the last fluctuation display. It is also possible to control the base state to a high probability / low base state from 5 changes before the end of the probable change state to the last change display. According to the same control as that shown in the present embodiment, by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag, the outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected. S95, S96, S100, S101)), whether or not the value of the high-probability counter or the high-base counter is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5) at the start of the variable display (the remaining number of times of the probable change state). Is determined to be within a predetermined number of times). If the number is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for out-of-course with a higher super-reach ratio shown in FIG. Is selected, and if the value of the counter is still larger than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the outlier variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case of increasing the ratio of super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times before) the end of the probable change state is not limited to that described in this embodiment. For example, by setting 71 in the high-probability counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and setting 66 in the high-base counter, conversely, from the 5th change before the probable change state ends to the last change display. Is controlled to a high-probability / low-base state, and by checking whether or not the value of the high-probability counter is less than or equal to 5, the outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D are selected. You may. Also, the number of changes after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71). A determination may be made as to whether the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the out-of-state change pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected (note that the probable change state ends). The same configuration may be applied to the case where the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the value of the counter for counting the number of variations after the end of the big hit game is 71, for example. If so, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. Further, when the control is performed such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the end of the probable change state (for example, five times before) to the end of the last fluctuation display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag and the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 10 illustrates a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a common outlier variation pattern type determination table is used in the case of the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is shown in which the common high-base out-of-offset variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages. As the type determination table, a plurality of outlier variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) according to the total number of storages stored may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of reserved storages is less than 3, and when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more. The table shows a case where two types of tables are used, i.e., a deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B, but the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to the method described in this embodiment. For example, a separate outfall variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for zero total pending storage, one total pending storage, and two total pending storages). , For three total pending storages, four total pending storages,... May be used separately. Further, for example, a loss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of values other than the total number of stored suspensions may be used. For example, an out-of-change variation pattern type determination table for the total number of pending storages 0 to 2, for the total number of pending storages 3 and for the total number of pending storages 4 may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of outlier variation pattern type determination tables are provided in accordance with the total number of pending storages, but outlier variation pattern type determination is performed in accordance with the first and second number of pending storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a loss fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number may be used (that is, the first reserved storage number). The outlier variation pattern type determination table for 0, the first first storage number, the first first storage number 2, the first first storage number 3, the first first storage number 4, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a loss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, an outlier variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved storage number 0-2, the first reserved storage number 3, the first reserved storage number 4, etc. may be used. Even in this case, when the number of first hold storages or the number of second hold storages is large (for example, 3 or more), a configuration may be adopted such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Further, even in such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The “specific production mode” refers to a fluctuation pattern type and a fluctuation pattern in which at least the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be high, such as a change pattern with a super reach, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. The “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display with a super reach) is executed according to the specific effect mode. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation degree when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (percentage of super reach executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined and lost). The rate at which super reach is performed in both cases) is determined by calculating.

  Each of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B for outliers contains a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, and includes non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2- 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state and the game state is a loss, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be understood that a variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state and the game state is a loss, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation that does not involve at least the reach (and does not accompany the specific effect such as the pseudo-run or the slide effect) is executed irrespective of the total number of stored suspensions. With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination tables (outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) include at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). Regarding a part, regardless of the number of rights (first reserved storage number, second reserved storage number, total reserved storage number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), The configuration is such that a common determination value (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” refers to, for example, a variable display result without a reach, without a specific effect such as a pseudo-run or a sliding effect, as described in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

  Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a case where a common large hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current game state is shown. Depending on whether the state is the normal state, a large hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state. ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved storages is 3 (or, for example, when the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is 2,), The variation pattern type determination table for outliers is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined in some cases. When the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of reserved storages is 1 or 2, However, (or, for example, even in the case where the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is smaller than 0 or 1), the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening. May be provided.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B are used to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result that the fluctuation pattern type is one of the normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the fluctuation pattern type is specially set. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the result of the decision to use either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, a normal CA 3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo run are included. A case where the type is classified into a certain normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (sometimes accompanied by pseudo run with super reach) is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern types, a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by a reach. 2 is shown. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern types may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-run or a sliding effect, instead of being divided according to the presence / absence of a reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG1-1 and the special PG2-1 which are the fluctuation patterns not accompanied by the specific effect, and the special CA4-2 includes the special PG1-2 and the special PG You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. The outlier variation pattern determination table 138A, when it is determined that the variable display result is “outlier”, based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in accordance with the variation pattern type determination result, It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. The outlier variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Note that “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100, when receiving the command 80XX (H), controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol change designation command) indicating that variable display (change) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure restoration designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. When power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, otherwise, the initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are display control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, for starting a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). In this embodiment, a big hit start specifying command or a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start specifying command is used depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of "15R probability variable big hit", "10R probability variable big hit", or "2R probability variable big hit", the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and "sudden probability variable big hit" or "small probability big hit" In the case of "hit", a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for specifying sudden change big hit start when suddenly hitting, but not to transmit the fanfare designation command for small hitting. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command during opening of the special winning opening) indicating that the special winning opening is open at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round, the special winning opening opening designation command that is different for each round is transmitted. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game, Transmits a special winning opening opening designation command (A10A (H)) designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round in the special winning opening specification command, the different special winning opening specification command is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the jackpot game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after opening the special winning opening that designates round 1 is transmitted, and when ending the tenth round during the jackpot game, Transmits a special winning opening specification command (A30A (H)) for specifying round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending 1 specifying command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end a big hit game with “15R certain variable big hit”, “10R certain variable big hit”, or “2R certain variable big hit”. The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden change big hit end designation when sudden change is a big hit, but not to send an ending designation command for small hit. Is also good.

  The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reservation storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first reservation storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (a second reserved storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second reserved storage number has been increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first subtraction storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first reservation storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second reserved storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command (first suspension storage number addition designation) indicating that the suspension storage number has increased or decreased, respectively, for the first suspension storage number and the second suspension storage number. A command, a second storage number addition designation command) is shown, but the form of the storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following form of the storage Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been increased is designated, and the number of the pending storage that has increased is specified. (The first number of reserved storages or the second number of reserved storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage is increased is specified, and the total number of pending storage is indicated by the EXT data. It may be configured to be set as a transmission.

(3) As the reserved storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been designated as the winning start (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has been increased) is designated. In addition to transmitting the effect control commands (the first start winning appointment designation command and the second start winning appointment designation command), a reservation storage number designation command for designating the number of reservation storages is transmitted separately from the command. The total number of reserved storages may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(4) As the reserved storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been designated as a winning start (whether the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage has been increased) is designated. In addition to transmitting the effect control commands (the first start winning appointment designation command and the second start winning appointment designation command), a reservation storage number designation command for designating the number of reservation storages is transmitted separately from the command. The increased reserved storage number (first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation command) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designating command) indicating the result of the determination of the type of a big hit, whether or not a big hit, a small hit, out of the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Also, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) as to which of the determination value ranges of the random number for variation pattern type determination among the prize-time determination results. (Fluctuation category command).

  In this embodiment, in a prize-winning effect process (see FIG. 22) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit, or a big hit at the time of starting prize. Then, it is determined which of the determination values the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and recognize the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the fluctuation category command, if the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designating command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the prize-winning effect process that will be described later that it is “out”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) with EXT data set to “00 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “15R probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined that “10R probable big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “2R probability change big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “03 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “04 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “small hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “05 (H)”. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designation command and when setting the display result designation command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which game state, which display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol will be displayed, and the random number Is set in the EXT data according to which of the determination values is determined to be in the range of the determination value, and the fluctuation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a normal state and a loss at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which EXT data is set to “00 (H)”. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of stored storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the fluctuation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the reception of the fluctuation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which EXT data is set to “03 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining a variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which EXT data is set to “04 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which EXT data is set to “05 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which EXT data is set to “06 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of stored storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least the super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned fluctuation categories belong to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). It is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the outlier variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the following fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29. Each fluctuation category in the fluctuation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and FIGS. 10C and 10D. A value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to the pattern type is picked up, and a threshold value used for category determination is derived.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the high probability / high base state and loses at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. It is determined whether the number is 1 to 219. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which the EXT data is set to “08 (H)”. Send a category 9 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7), the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data. A variable category 10 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the high probability / low base state and out of the game at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the at-winning-time production process described later. It is determined whether it is 1 to 79 or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which the EXT data is set to “0A (H)”. Send a category 11 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7), the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data. Send the fluctuation category 12 command.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the prize-winning effect described later, if it is out of place, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the process of determining the game state in step S226 can be omitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the time of the start winning that “10R probable big hit” or “2R probable big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. It is determined whether it is 1 to 74 or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “10 (H)”. 21 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data. A change category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “15R probability change big hit” is obtained at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “13 (H)”. 24 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3). A fluctuation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a probability change big hit suddenly occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Is determined. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “16 (H)”. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “17 (H)”. 28 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  It should be noted that the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the prize determination is made at the time of the start prize and when the fluctuation display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the prize determination result designation command is not always the same. In some cases, the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least the non-reach CA2-1, the super CA2-7, and the super CA3-3, regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), no inconsistency occurs between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. For this reason, in this embodiment, for a variable display determined at the time of winning when the non-reach CA2-1, the super CA2-7, or the super CA3-3 is selected as the fluctuation pattern type, a hold announcement effect described later is provided as a suggestion effect. Be executed. It should be noted that the fluctuation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, the fluctuation category 1 command and the fluctuation category 1 command) only when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern types are the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, and super CA3-3. Only the fluctuation category 8 command, the fluctuation category 23 command, and the fluctuation category 26 command) may be transmitted, and the fluctuation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other fluctuation pattern types. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, a fluctuation category command indicating that the fluctuation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “suggested effect” is a notice effect that is performed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as a suggestion effect, a notification effect (holding notification effect to be described later) that is immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be notified occurs is executed (however, as described later, a new notification effect is performed). Even if a start winning prize occurs, the hold announcement effect is limited, and the hold announcement effect may be executed at the timing when the hold memory is exhausted and the hold display is shifted).

  In addition, as a suggestive effect, the effect is started from a variable display that is started after a start prize for the variable display to be announced is generated, and a plurality of times before the variable display to be the target of the preliminary announcement is started. A notice effect that is continuously performed over the variable display (for example, a mode in which a chance is stopped or a display screen is flashed over a plurality of variable displays (also referred to as a “change in the variation form at the time of symbol variation”) or A mode in which it is determined whether or not the mode is changed in such a manner that the background screens meet each other over a plurality of variable displays (also referred to as “mode shift”), or a mode in which the countdown is performed over a plurality of variable displays (“ A continuous notice effect of “countdown”) may be executed. However, in this case, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of change displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only in one change display prior to the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may be performed. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the change display to be the target of the notice effect is started, and the notice effect is performed up to the change display immediately before the change display to be the target of the notice effect. The process may end, or a preview effect may be performed over a variable display that is a target of the preview effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the variable display a plurality of times. For example, a notice effect may be executed intermittently in a plurality of variable displays every other time or every other time. However, with regard to the continuous announcement effect in the “countdown” mode, the effect becomes unnatural if the countdown is performed only once or intermittently, so it is desirable to perform the effect continuously over a plurality of variable displays.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case in which a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs in the high base state, and a case in which a starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs during the jackpot game. Except for this (see steps S1215A and S1216A), each time a start winning is generated, a prize winning determination process is executed, and a symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted and a variable category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Is done. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and the variation category command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or a reach will be made before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold announcement effect to be announced.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. I do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time a special winning symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b due to a winning start. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a two-byte configuration, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to “0”. Such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a process of fetching 1-byte data by an interrupt process.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. An image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol indicator 8b, and performs the effect along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the device 9, it is possible to prevent the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 from increasing.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program for a special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, if the first starting port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 is turned on, that is, the starting to the first starting winning port 13 is performed. If a winning has occurred, a first start-up switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second starting port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processing in steps S300 to S310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, the microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (the total number of hold storage). The number of stored numeric data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, a big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  Variation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) in the fluctuation pattern is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol change processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing has elapsed (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 has timed out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer has become 0), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag has become 4, as described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting content of the output buffer.

  Big winning opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to transmit the special winning opening opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening processing is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. (In this example, 6). The pre-winning opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process is also a process of starting a big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round of the special winning opening opening designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game, Transmits a special winning opening opening designation command (A10A (H)) designating round 10.

  Big winning opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the processing during opening of the special winning opening, processing for confirming establishment of a closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition to performing control to transmit a designation command after the jackpot is released to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, it is updated to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 100 perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Further, a process of setting a flag (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) indicating a game state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the big winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. The execution time of the special winning opening process is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. Note that the small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. However, when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed for the small hit game. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit opening processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all the openings have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 100 perform display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S312 and S314. FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing in step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting port switch passage processing in step S314.

  First, with reference to FIG. In the first startup port switch passage process executed when the first startup port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting one reserved storage number is 4) (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (hard hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, the random number for random determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted when the first special symbol starts to change. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (hard hit determination random number) as a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. Note that the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a random number value such as a random number for jackpot determination is stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage. It is not limited to random numbers. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a random number for big hit determination or the like, and the result of the determination may be stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage. .

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is the high base state is set (step S1215A). If it has been set, the process moves directly to step S1220A. If the high base flag has not been set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit game state or a small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds directly to step S1220A.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize-winning effect process is performed in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always enters the first starting winning opening 13 and executes the winning effect processing of step S1217A. The command and the variation category command are both transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A to S1220A, when a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13, the symbol designating is performed when the winning effect processing of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, a command, a fluctuation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command, is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S1215A or step S1216A that Y has not been performed, the CPU 56 does not execute the prize-winning stage effect processing in step S1217A. Is performed, and control for transmitting a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is not performed. When the prize-winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed, a prize-winning determination result specification in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the prize-winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data. Commands (symbol designating command, variable category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S1215A, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the processing of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. A winning effect process is executed. Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S1216A, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the step S1217A is performed only when the game is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Is performed at the time of winning. Note that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the case of the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A in the case of the small hit gaming state to execute the prize winning effect process.

  Further, in this embodiment, the control of opening the special winning opening for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) is performed after the start of the big hit is notified of the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). This is a state in which the opening of the special winning opening in the final round is completed and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, this is a state in which the processes from the special winning opening opening process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process process are being executed.

  Next, the second starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second startup port switch passage process executed when the second startup port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved port switch number). It is checked whether the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (hard hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It is to be noted that the random number for random determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the change of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1219B). Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218B and S1219B, the CPU 56 always makes a symbol designation every time the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the prize effect processing of step S1217B is executed. The command and the variation category command are both transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218B to S1220B, a symbol is designated when a winning prize is generated in the second starting prize port 14 and the prize effect processing of step S1217B is performed. A set of three commands, a command, a fluctuation category command, and a command for specifying the addition of the second reserved storage number, is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  Note that the same processing as in step S1215A is also performed in the second starting port switch passing processing, and the winning effect processing in step S1217B may not be performed in the high base state. That is, the winning effect process of step S1217B may be executed only in the low base state, and the symbol designating command and the variable category command may be transmitted.

  Also, in the second starting port switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and if a big hit game is being played, the prize winning effect process of step S1217B may not be executed. Also, in the second starting port switch passing processing, the prize effect processing of step S1217B may not be executed (ie, the prize determination processing may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning effect processing of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect production process, the CPU 56 first compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value in the normal state shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in a special symbol normal process to be described later, a big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern setting process. Alternatively, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the prize-winning effect processing, it is confirmed in advance whether a big hit or a small hit or not, and which judgment value range of the random number for judging the type of the big hit and the variation pattern type is determined. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as described later, the microcomputer for effect control based on the determination result at the time of winning. In step 100, a hold announcement effect is executed to announce that a big hit or a super reach will occur during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probable change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is determined whether or not they match (step S222). Note that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when it is determined in step S221 that the winning change is made at the start winning prize and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when it is determined in step S221 whether or not the winning change is made at the time of the start winning and the time when the change display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the start of the change). If there is a 15R probability variable hit, a 10R probability variable hit, a 2R probability variable hit, or a sudden variable hit suddenly, the normal state is changed to the positive state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with FIG. ) And (C) are compared with each other to determine whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect processing of step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (the first winning winning table) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. In addition, when there is a winning start in the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S1217B), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in (1).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high probability state and the high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state in step S225 at the time of the start winning, until the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started, More than one variable display may be performed. Therefore, in the step S225 at the time of starting winning, it is checked whether or not it is in the high probability state and whether or not it is in the high base state. (For example, if a 15R probability variable hit, a 10R probability variable hit, or a sudden probability variable hit occurs before the start of the change, the state changes from the normal state to the probability variable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of a winning start and the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for out-of-position according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing a threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the value is larger than the threshold, the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination falls within any of the determination values. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the fluctuation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219. Determines that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value 79 when determining that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than a threshold value 79. Determines that “0A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than a threshold value 79. Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 89 (that is, if the threshold value is 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or less than the threshold value 99 (that is, if it is 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the difference is less than or equal to the threshold value 169 (that is, if it is 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the difference is equal to or smaller than the threshold 199 (that is, if the difference is 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is less than or equal to the threshold value 214 (that is, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of the threshold determination described above, the thresholds are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in ascending order of the threshold value. It does not fall within the range below the threshold value of the previous order. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79, when determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 89, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 which is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. Is determined to be within the range. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold value is determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in ascending order is shown. 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the case where the determination is made using the other threshold values described below.

  The threshold in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without performing the determination of the game state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is at least common for the variation pattern type of “non-reach loss” and the variation pattern type of “super-reach loss”, It can be determined whether or not “out-of-reach” or “out-of-reach out” occurs.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sends the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” to the symbol designating command. Is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251 and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 251 (1 to 251) in step S232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the fluctuation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case of executing the winning effect processing of step S1217A), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variable jackpot”, “10R probability variable jackpot”, “2R probability variable jackpot”, or “sudden probability variable jackpot”. In addition, when there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S1217B), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. Using 131b, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variable hit”, “10R probability variable hit”, “2R probability variable hit”, or “sudden probability variable hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step S230). In this case, if it is determined that the hit is "15R certain change big hit", the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating "15R certain change big hit" in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the hit is “10R probability change big hit”, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “02 (H)” indicating that the hit becomes “10R probability change hit” in the symbol designating command. If it is determined that the "2R probability change big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating "2R probability change hit" in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating the "sudden probability change big hit" to the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each big hit threshold in accordance with the big hit type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined to be “10R probability variable hit” or “2R probability variable hit”. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 74. Determines that “10 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 149 (that is, if it is 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or smaller than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “15R probable big hit”, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 38 and 79. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining a variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 79 (that is, if it is 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “suddenly variable big hit”, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 100. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not less than 100 (that is, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for random determination of variation pattern type (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination It is determined whether the value falls within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold, a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set fluctuation pattern type By using the determination table, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the type of the variation pattern may be determined.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (Step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)” or “10B” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) to 18 (H) are set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined even when it is determined that a large hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs, the determination of the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be performed. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of a prize when it is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a change category command comprehensively indicating that the change pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type is used, but the variation that is comprehensively indicated as one of the jackpot variation pattern types is shown. On the basis of the reception of the category command, a hold announcement effect described later may be executed.

  FIGS. 23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the sum reserved storage number is 0, if the customer wait demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer wait demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. Note that, for example, upon transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. Then, if the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completed flag is set and the customer waiting demonstration is repeated. What is necessary is just to control not to transmit a demonstration designation command. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next special symbol change display is started.

  If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved number is not 0, the CPU 56 sets a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed on the second special symbol). Is set to indicate "second" (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed such that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as shown in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number (random R) is determined in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the big hit determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the big hit determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed. However, the processing in steps S221 and S222 may not be performed.) With such a configuration, in a case where the change display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, the big hit determination result at the time of the winning determination and the big hit determination result at the start of the actual change are determined. Deviation can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (Step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines that each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and sets the value in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. I do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage number in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the symbols stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved number of storage = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 sums the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. In addition, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective summed pending storage numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the summed suspended storage number = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total number of reserved storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current game state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set. Controls transmission of the specified command. When only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. If neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a normal state background designation command.

  Note that, specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 assigns an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, a background designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold storage number subtraction) are issued for each timer interrupt. The command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the order of the designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command). Specifically, when changing the special symbol, a background designating command is transmitted first, a variation pattern command is transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, a display result specifying command is transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, and after a lapse of 4 ms. A reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. At the start of the special symbol variation, a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt command as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first starting winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol. Data is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out a random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. Note that, in this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination extracted in step S1214A of the first startup port switch passage process or step S1214B of the second startup port switch passage process and stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in advance. The random number is read, and a big hit is determined. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of deciding to determine a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. In other words, it is a program for executing the processing of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the big hit determination process, when the game state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit is higher than in the non-probability state (normal state). Is configured to be higher. More specifically, a large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 54 in which a numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A is set in the ROM 54) in which a large number of big-hit determination values are set in advance, There is provided a normal-time jackpot determination table (a table in the ROM 54 in which numerical values on the left side in FIG. 8A are set) which are set to be smaller than the time-and-big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is the probable change state. When the gaming state is the probable change state, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining a big hit using the probable change time big hit determination table, and the game state is normally set. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  It should be noted that whether or not the current game state is the probability change state is determined based on whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the probable change state, and is reset when the probable change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be "15R probability variable big hit", "10R probability variable big hit", "2R probability variable big hit" or "sudden probability variable big hit", and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 71 times) is completed after the end of the big hit game, the reset is performed.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 checks the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine whether to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. . If it is determined that the small hit is made (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match any of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. Then, a big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used for determining the big hit type to be one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for the jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probable big hit”, “ "10R probable big hit", "2R probable big hit" or "sudden probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). Note that, in this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first starting port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second starting port switch passing process and stored in the first holding buffer or the second holding buffer in advance. Read the random number for use and determine the type of jackpot. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The probability that sudden change big hits are suddenly selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “15R probable big hit”, “01” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data showing the big hit type. When the jackpot type is "2R probable big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "sudden positive change big hit", "04" is set as data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a lost symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, one of the jackpot symbols “1”, “3”, “7”, or “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. I do. In other words, if the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly variable big hit", "1" is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol, and if it is determined to be "2R positive variable big hit", "3" is set to a special symbol stop symbol. When the decision is made, "7R" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol when it is determined to be "10R probability variable hit", and "9" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol when it is determined to be "15R probability variable hit". . When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined first and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the jackpot type determination random number, and a corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the change pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the change pattern type for the big hit as a table used to determine the change pattern type to any one of the plurality of types, as shown in FIG. ) To (C)) (step S92). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certain change state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be "15R probability variable big hit", "10R probability variable big hit", "2R probability variable big hit" or "sudden probability variable big hit", and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 70 times) is ended after the end of the big hit game.

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high-probability flag is not set (N in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the table used to determine the variation pattern type for a loss 135A ( (See FIG. 10A) (step S98). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the outlier variation pattern type determination table. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the high-probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the high-probability / low-base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for this, a variation pattern type determination table for out-of-office 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the state is controlled to the low probability / high base state). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, it is in the high probability / high base state), and the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S95 to S101, if the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of storages to be held is 3 or more, the variation for out-of-position shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the outlier variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102 described later, and if the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the variation may be determined in the process of step S105. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortened fluctuation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation used in the high probability / high base state (see FIG. 10C), and a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of retained storages (see FIG. 10C). Although FIG. 10B shows a different table, a common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortened fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, if the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), The fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when determining “Y” in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of reserved storages is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 2 (the random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer), and performs the processing in step S92, S94, S98, S99, S100 or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern is one of a plurality of types, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102, as a hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 11). ), And selects one of the out-of-place variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S103). In addition, the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is read from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer), and the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S105). In the case where the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 sets the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern determination for generating the random number for the fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). , The fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol change designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol change designation command. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol change designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting an effect control command (a fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission processing (Step S302) (Step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be a loss, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. (Including the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7) shown in FIG. 1 and prepare one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. Alternatively, the variation pattern type may be determined.

  Also, when determining whether or not to reach by the lottery process using the random number for reach determination, the reach of the reach is determined in accordance with the total number of reserved storages (the number of first reserved storages or the number of second reserved storages). Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not reach is performed so that the reach probability decreases as the number of pending storages increases. In this case, the CPU 56 determines, for example, whether or not “super reach loss” or “non-reach loss” in the prize-winning effect process matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table. The determination as to whether or not the vehicle may be reached may be made in advance. In consideration of the fact that the execution ratio of the announcement effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number, the “super reach loss” depending on the variation pattern type. It is preferable to determine in advance whether or not a “non-reach loss” will be made and perform a hold announcement effect.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits any one of the display result 1 to the display result 6 designation effect control commands (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether the big hit flag is set (Step S110). If not set, the process moves to step S118. If the big hit flag is set, and if the big hit type is “15R probable big hit”, control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). It should be noted that the determination as to whether the hit is “15R probability change big hit” is made by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the type of the big hit is “10R certain variable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). It should be noted that whether or not it is “10R probability variable big hit” is determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the type of the big hit is “2R probability big hit”, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). It is to be noted that whether or not the “2R probability variable big hit” is determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. Then, when it is not any of “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit” and “2R probable big hit” (that is, when it is “sudden probable big hit”), the CPU 56 controls the transmission of the display result 5 designation command. Performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag has been set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 6 designation command (step S119). If the small hit flag has not been set (N in step S118), that is, if the small hit has occurred, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted or not is determined, for example, by the retention indicating that the reserved storage number subtraction designation command was transmitted when transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completed flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is reset by a special symbol stop process or a big hit end process, which will be described later, when ending the change display of the special symbol or ending the big hit. Just fine.

  Next, if the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S1125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol fixing designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high-probability flag indicating the high-probability state and the high-base flag indicating the high-base state if it is set (step S132). ), Control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is “15R certain big hit”, “10R certain big hit” or “2R certain big hit”, a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is sudden change big hit, a small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit”, “2R probable big hit” or “sudden probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (big hit type). Is determined based on the data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "15R probability change big hit", 10 times in the case of "10R probability change big hit", and "2R probability change big hit" or "sudden probability change big hit" is displayed in the special winning opening counter. In this case, twice.) Is set (step S135). Also, a round time per round in the big hit game is set. In this case, the same two rounds are set as the number of rounds in the case of the sudden change big hit and the case of the 2R certain big hit, but different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden change big hit, 0.1 second is set as the round time, and in the case of 2R certain change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. It should be noted that 29 seconds is set as the round time also in the case of the 15R probability change jackpot and the 10R probability change hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). If the high-probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the probable state (high-probability / high-base state or high-probability / low-base state)), it indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high-probability state. The value of the high probability number counter is decremented by one (step S138). When the value of the high-probability counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high-probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of the high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by -1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after the subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, control goes to a step S145. If the high base flag has not been set, the process directly proceeds to step S145.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time when the small hit has occurred, for example, the effect display device 9 is notified) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Also, the number of times of opening (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step S160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of "15R probable big hit", "10R probable big hit" or "2R probable big hit", the big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted and "sudden probable big hit" , A small hit / suddenly variable big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process ends.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets the high probability flag and shifts the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number (for example, 71 times) to a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of variable display in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) to a high base number counter for counting the number of times of variable display in the high base state (step S169).

  By executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the game is shifted to the high probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display ends 70 times. Then, after the 70th variation display is completed after the big hit is completed and until the 71st variation display is completed, the game state is shifted to the high probability / low base state. Return to

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set when the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is a hit in the ordinary symbol process process (see step S27). If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by lengthening the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. Further, the high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, when it is configured to be able to control the normal symbol change state in which the probability of making the normal symbol change display result a hit is high, the high base flag determines whether or not the normal symbol change display result is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (Step S300) (Step S170).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 56 converts the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display into the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one every 0.2 seconds. After that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Variation display of special symbols on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, if the process shifts to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 sets a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. After the process of step S3204 is performed and the special symbol display control data for displaying the stopped symbols is set, the setting data is not changed. Therefore, the latest special symbol display control data is used in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is kept stopped until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol change display flag is displayed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation from occurring between the fluctuation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the fluctuation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission processing. The time timer may be configured to decrement by one.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag has been described. However, in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, an end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stopped symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). . Then, effect control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control processing, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and is selected in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number updating process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). After that, the procedure moves to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command receiving buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six effect control commands having a 2-byte configuration is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It is not always necessary to use the ring buffer format.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis processing, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14). The interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt processing executed every 4 ms.

  FIGS. 33 to 36 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 checks the contents of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, first, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S614), effect control CPU 101 stores the received fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designation command (step S619), effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / suddenly variable hit big start command receiving flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (step S631), effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed on effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of a predetermined effect symbol.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (a screen displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. The display is controlled (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly variable big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / suddenly variable big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S651), the effect controlling CPU 101 stores the received symbol designating command in the first available prize-winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 37, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total number of pending storages are secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first starting port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second starting port switch passing process in FIG. 20, the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting port. When there is a start winning in the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designated command or second reserved storage number) are included in one timer interrupt. 3) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start prize winning command storage area can store a symbol designating command, a fluctuation category command, and a hold storage number addition designating command in association with each other. Is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first empty storage area of the start-winning-time command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, commands are transmitted in the order of a symbol designating command, a fluctuation category command, and a command for adding the number of pending storages within one timer interrupt. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, the command is shown in FIG. As described above, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designating command are stored in this order (in FIG. 37, the commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5). The stored example is shown).

  Note that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 37 starts the effect symbol variation start processing described later at the timing of starting the effect symbol variation display each time the effect symbol variation display is started. It is sequentially deleted in step S6515. In this case, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Therefore, first, the storage area 5 storing the second reserved storage (the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H) ) Is deleted). Next, if the second reserved storage does not newly occur, only the first reserved storage is stored, so that it is stored in the first storage area 1 at the next timing when the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when a variation display of a new effect symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 37, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the command received at the time of the start winning at the first start winning opening 13 and the command received at the time of the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 are stored in a common start winning time command storage area. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed, and it is not necessary to manage the winning order. A first start winning command storage area for storing a command received at the time of the start winning prize and a second start winning command storage area for storing the command received at the time of the starting prize to the second start winning port 14 are separately provided. It may be configured as follows.

  Also, in the storage area 2 of the command storage area at the time of the start winning shown in FIG. 37, an example is shown in which the command reception cannot be performed normally and the variable category command is omitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 37, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the contents of the second storage area in which the variable category command should be originally stored remain "0000 (H)". Is shown.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the commands at the time of the start winning (symbol designating command, variation category command, and command for specifying the addition of the number of held storages) stored in the starting winning command storage area shown in FIG. Based on the hold announcement effect process (1) (see step S800B) and the hold announcement effect process (2) (see steps S660C and S662C), the setting of the hold announcement effect is performed. If the specified command, fluctuation category command, and retention memory number addition designation command) are missed or inconsistent, the suspension notice effect will be displayed until the fluctuation display of the retention memory corresponding to the command at the time of the start prize is consumed. Limited. In the following, a period until a command is missed at the time of a start winning prize in which a hold announcement effect is restricted or a hold memory in which inconsistency occurs is consumed is also referred to as a hold announcement limit period.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the execution of the hold announcement effect is completely prohibited with respect to the hold memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent at the time of the start winning award, or the hold memory that starts winning within the hold advance notice restriction period. However, the present invention is not limited to this case. For example, regarding the hold memory that started winning within the hold notice restriction period, when the hold notice where the command was missed or inconsistent at the time of the start winning where the hold notice effect was restricted was exhausted and the hold notice restriction period was released. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be changed to retroactively start the hold announcement effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if a new start winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning, if a predetermined effect is being executed, or if a movable object notice effect is being executed, a super reach effect Is executed, the second preliminary storage is present, and the second special symbol is being displayed while being changed, so that the preliminary announcement effect is not immediately started (in this case, as will be described later, When the memory is consumed (when the hold display is shifted), the hold announcement effect can be started retroactively), and the hold announcement effect is limited. In the example shown in FIG. 37, when a new start winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning, during the execution of the predetermined effect, during the execution of the movable object announcement effect, during the execution of the super-reach effect, and during the second hold storage. In the case where the determination of the hold announcement effect is postponed so as not to immediately start the hold announcement effect due to the existence of the change of the second special symbol or the like, the storage area corresponding to the hold memory (FIG. 37) In the example shown in (2), the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area 4) is set to "1" indicating that the determination of the hold announcement effect has been postponed.

  In this embodiment, “restricting the hold announcement effect” means that the hold announcement effect is not set at all in the hold memory corresponding to the start winning that has occurred during the hold advance announcement restriction period. And the concept of delaying the start timing of the pending announcement effect. Furthermore, the concept of "restricting the hold announcement effect" includes prohibiting retroactive execution of the hold announcement effect for the hold memory corresponding to the hold display that is currently being displayed, or the hold announcement effect. This includes delaying the start timing of the program.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, when a new command is stored in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information of the storage area in which the new command is stored becomes “1”. Is set. The undetermined information is information indicating that it is still unprocessed in the hold announcement effect process (1) (see step S800B) and the hold display return process (see step S8114) described later. The undetermined information is set to “1” when a new command is received, and thereafter, the command is processed in the hold announcement effect processing (1) (see step S800B), or the hold display return processing (see step S8114) ) Is cleared to "0" when the command is processed. In this embodiment, the undetermined information is set to “1” when the symbol designating command is stored in step S652 unless the symbol designating command is missed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the command for adding the number of retained storages, which are received at the time of occurrence of the start winning, are also referred to as the command at the time of starting winning. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start winning, the reserved storage number addition designation command which is a command for designating information that can recognize that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, this is also referred to as pending storage information. In addition, a symbol designating command which is a command indicating whether a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 22) at the time of the start winning, a big hit type determination result, and a fluctuation pattern type determination result. When the fluctuation category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning-time determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any of the variable category commands (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in each of the storage areas 1 in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. 8 is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654). However, if the variable category command or the command to add the number of pending storages has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designating command is stored, it will be received earlier than the variable category command in the current timer interrupt. This means that the desired symbol designating command has been missed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in the first empty storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and stores the undetermined information of the storage area. Is set to “1”.

  If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S655), the production control CPU 101 converts the received first reserved storage number addition designation command into the start prize winning command formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area, the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area storing the command (step S656A). However, the storage number addition designation command (the first storage number addition designation command or the second reservation number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command are stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received earlier than the first hold storage number addition designation command have been missed in the current timer interrupt. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first reserved storage number addition designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step S656B).

  If the received production control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S657), the production control CPU 101 transmits the received second reserved storage number addition designation command to the start winning command stored in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage areas of the respective storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area (step S658A). However, the storage number addition designation command (the first storage number addition designation command or the second reservation number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command and the fluctuation category command are stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received earlier than the second reserved storage number addition designation command have been missed in the current timer interrupt. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second reserved storage number addition designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step S658B).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S659), production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step S659). Step S660A). The effect control CPU 101 deletes one first hold display in the first hold storage display section 9a, shifts the remaining first hold displays after the deleted first hold storage one by one, and The first hold storage number display in the one hold storage display section 9a is updated (step S660B). For example, when the first to third first hold indications of the first hold storage display section 9a are lit, and when the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received, the first The first hold display is erased, the first hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area. Shift to Next, effect control CPU 101 executes a suspension notice effect process (2) (step S660C).

  In this embodiment, when a hold announcement effect is executed, a hold display to be newly displayed is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode at a timing when a new start prize is generated and a command at the time of the start prize is received. When the hold announcement effect is immediately started and after the hold announcement effect determination is postponed, the hold memory is consumed (shifting the hold display), and the display mode of the hold display whose postponement is postponed is usually set. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode different from the mode and the reserved announcement effect is started retrospectively. In this embodiment, the process of determining and starting the hold announcement effect at the timing when a new start winning is generated is called the hold announcement effect (1) (see step S800B), and the hold memory is consumed (the hold display is shifted). The process of determining and starting the suspension notice effect at the timing of the execution is referred to as suspension notice effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step S661). Step S662A). The effect control CPU 101 deletes one second hold display in the second hold storage display section 9b, shifts the remaining second hold displays after the deleted second hold storage one by one, and The second hold storage number display in the second hold storage display section 9a is updated (step S662B). For example, when the first to third first hold indications of the second hold storage display section 9b are illuminated, and a second hold storage number subtraction designation command is received (this embodiment In this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, so that if there is at least one second reserved storage, the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command will be received.) And shift the second hold display displayed second to the first display area, and shift the second hold display displayed third to the second display area. . Next, effect control CPU 101 executes a suspension notice effect process (2) (step S662C).

  If the received effect control command is a customer wait demonstration designation command (step S663), effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a customer wait demonstration screen predetermined on effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not immediately displayed based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The display of the waiting demo screen may be started. Further, effect control CPU 101 clears the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step S665). In other words, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, the number of the first reserved storage and the number of the second reserved storage are both 0, and the variable display is not executed. The first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are reset. By executing the process of step S665, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes an omission of addition or subtraction of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number, and an erroneous first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number. Even when the number is recognized, the first storage number and the second storage number can be reset and returned to a normal state by interrupting the reserved storage.

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). (Background screen) (step S667). If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high-probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is in the high-probability state and a high-base state flag indicating that the gaming state is in the high-base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen of a red display color) (step S670). Further, effect control CPU 101 sets the high probability state flag and also sets the high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high-probability / low-base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, , The background screen of an orange display color) (step S673). Further, effect control CPU 101 sets the high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening opening command (step S678), the effect controlling CPU 101 sets a special winning opening opening flag (step S679). Further, effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening opening designation command in the special winning opening opening designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the special winning opening opening designation command stored in the special winning opening opening designation command storage area in the special winning opening opening designation command storage area to recognize the round in the big hit game. Can be.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the special winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the special winning opening (step S682). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the special winning opening after opening designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined effect process for determining and executing a predetermined effect (step S800A).

  Note that the “predetermined effect” is an effect that notifies the possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 will be controlled to a state where the game ball can easily enter (open state). In the predetermined effect processing of step S800A, the effect control CPU 101 receives the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol based on a command indicating the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol received from the game control microcomputer 560, for example. It is determined whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state), and based on the result of the determination, control is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined effect is to be performed or to execute the predetermined effect. In this embodiment, specifically, an effect is performed in a predetermined effect execution area 9F in which the roulette is rotated in accordance with the normal symbol change display, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. In the predetermined effect execution area 9F, the display result of "O" is stopped and displayed, and when the variable winning prize ball device 15 is not opened, the display result of "X" is stopped and displayed in the predetermined effect execution area 9F. The effect of the mode is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect is to notify whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state, and is one of the notice effects.

  In addition, by performing the predetermined effect, not only the possibility that the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to a state where the game ball can easily enter (opened state) is notified, but also whether the reach effect is executed or not and the big hit May be notified. In this case, for example, by stopping and displaying the display result of "chance" or "hot heat" instead of "○" or "x" as the display result of the predetermined effect, it is possible to reach (and further to reach May be announced. Further, for example, the display result of “small” may be stopped and displayed to notify the possibility of a small hit.

  Further, effect control CPU 101 executes a reservation notice effect process (1) (step S800B).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control relating to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also performed in the second control. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. The variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be executed by different effect control process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed based on which effect control process process has performed the effect symbol variation display.

  Variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change process (step S802).

  Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the fluctuation of the effect symbol and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Processing during round (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Then, if the round end condition is satisfied, and if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the last round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): The effect display device 9 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing the hold announcement effect process (1) (step S800B). In the hold announcement effect process (1) (the process of determining and executing the hold announcement effect at the timing when the start winning prize is generated), the effect control CPU 101 first performs the non-display control for setting the hold display described later to the non-display state. It is confirmed whether or not the pending non-display flag indicating that the program is being executed is set (step S6000).

  In this embodiment, as described later, non-display control is executed when a movable object announcement effect is being executed or a super reach effect is being executed. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S6000, in this embodiment, even if a new starting winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning, the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect are being executed. In such a case, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, the hold notice effect is not immediately started, and the hold notice effect is restricted. (In this case, the movable display is executed by executing a hold display return process described later. At the end of the notice effect or the super-reach effect, the state returns to the state where the hold display is displayed in a state where the hold display is increased by an amount corresponding to the start winning award generated during the non-display control).

  If the hold non-displaying flag is set (that is, if the hold display is in the non-display state), the process ends. If the holding non-displaying flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the command storage area at the time of start winning shown in FIG. (Step S6001). If there is no storage area for which the undetermined information is “1” (Y in step S6001), the process ends.

  If there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” (N in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 determines the command stored in the storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”. It is determined whether or not a hold notice setting restriction flag indicating the hold notice limit period is set as well as a hold notice limit period (step S6002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag has been set, the flow shifts to step S6018.

  If the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks the content of the command at the time of the start winning of the current processing target, and determines whether or not all the commands at the time of the start winning are received in order. Confirm (step S6003).

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, as a command at the time of the start winning, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (a first reservation storage number addition designation command or a second reservation storage number addition designation command) Command) should be received in one timer interrupt at a time. Therefore, the MODE data is stored in the command storage area at the time of start winning, "C4 (H)", "C6 (H)", And "C0 (H)" (or "C1 (H)") should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any one of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command was missed due to noise or garbled MODE data, and the command could not be received correctly. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbols should be received in the order of the symbol designating command, the fluctuation category command, and the command for adding the number of retained storages (the command for specifying the number of storages to be retained first or the command for adding the number of retained storages). Therefore, the MODE data is stored in the start winning command storage area in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”). Should be there. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, if the order is different (for example, “C6 (H)” is stored before “C4 (H)”), the effect control CPU 101 stores the MODE data. B), it can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If it is determined that the received start prize commands are out of order or are partially missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. If it is determined that all the commands at the time of the start winning have been received in order, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variable category command match. (Step S6004). More specifically, when a design 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating an outlier is stored as a design designation command, a variation category 1 command to a variation category 12 command corresponding to the outage are stored as variation category commands. One of them must be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, if the fluctuation category 21 command to the fluctuation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, the sudden change big hit, and the small hit are stored, the effect control CPU 101 It can be determined that the content of the category command does not match and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 to S6004, in this embodiment, even if a new start winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning, a command at the time of starting winning cannot be received or an error occurs. In the case where the matching has occurred, the pending announcement effect is restricted (in this embodiment, the execution of the advance announcement effect is prohibited).

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004 is determined to be N, the process shifts to step S6017 and shifts to the hold notice restriction period. This is not the only case. For example, the process may shift to step S6017 and shift to the hold notice restriction period on condition that N is determined in all the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004.

  Further, the program need not necessarily be configured to provide all the two determination processes of steps S6003 to S6004, and the program may be configured to provide only one of the determination processes of steps S6003 to S6004. .

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a predetermined effect is being executed (step S6005). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process of step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6005. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the flow shifts to step S6021.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is 0. Is confirmed (step S6006). If the second reserved storage number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved storage), the flow shifts to step S6021.

  If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved storage), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second special symbol is being changed and displayed (step S6007). Note that whether or not the second special symbol variation display is being performed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the display of the second special symbol is being changed, the flow shifts to step S6021.

  By executing the processing of steps S6005 to S6007, in this embodiment, even if a new start winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning, a predetermined effect is being executed, or the second hold is performed. If there is a memory, and if the change display of the second special symbol is being performed, the determination of the hold announcement effect is postponed so that the hold advance effect is not immediately started, and the hold advance effect is limited.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using a random number for determining whether or not to perform the hold announcement effect and the effect mode based on the current process target variation category command. Then, it is determined whether or not to perform the hold announcement effect and the effect mode (step S6008).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a suspension notice determination table for determining whether or not to perform a suspension notice effect and an effect form. As shown in FIG. 41, in the hold notice determination table, determination values are assigned to no hold notice effect, hold notice effect (blue), hold notice effect (red), and hold notice effect (rainbow), respectively. ing. The hold notice effect (blue) is a hold notice effect in a form in which a hold display of a notice target is displayed in a blue circle display. The hold announcement effect (red) is a hold announcement effect in a form in which a hold display of a notice target is displayed in a red circle display. The hold announcement effect (rainbow) is a hold announcement effect in a mode in which the hold display of the notification target is displayed in a rainbow-colored circular display. In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a normal display mode (a display mode in which the hold announcement effect is not performed), the hold display is displayed as a green circle.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the hold advance notice determination table indicates that the change category command specifies that the change pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1 (specifically, the command C600 (H) is received). ), When it is specified by the fluctuation category command that the fluctuation pattern type is the super CA2-7 (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), and when the fluctuation category command is the super CA3 The determination value is assigned only when it is determined that the variation pattern type is −3 (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received). Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold announcement effect can be executed only in the case of non-reach loss, super-reach loss, or super-reach jackpot.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present embodiment, and a hold announcement effect may be executed even in a non-reach out-of-reach situation, a super-reach out-of-reach situation, and a change category other than the super reach jackpot. In this case, for example, it may be configured to specify only whether or not a big hit will be made based on the fluctuation category command, and to execute the hold announcement effect according to the specified result.

  Further, in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned to the reserved announcement effect (red) and the reserved announcement effect (rainbow) only when the super reach is lost or the super reach is a big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the hold notice effect is executed in such a manner that the hold indication of the notice object is displayed in a red or iridescent circle display, it will be determined that a super reach will be achieved. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the expectation (reliability) of the hold announcement effect (rainbow) for the jackpot is the highest, followed by the expectation degree (reliability) of the hold announcement effect (red) for the jackpot. The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation (reliability) of the hold announcement effect (blue) to the jackpot is the lowest and the degree of expectation (reliability) to the jackpot is lowest.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 41, this embodiment shows a case where the presence / absence of a suspension notice effect is determined and the form of the suspension notice effect is determined collectively by a lottery process using one random number. However, the presence / absence of the reserved announcement effect and the mode of the reserved announcement effect may be determined in two stages by a lottery process using different random numbers. That is, first, only the presence / absence of the hold announcement effect is determined by a lottery process using one random number, and when it is determined that the hold advance effect is to be executed, the form of the hold announcement effect is performed by a lottery process using another random number. May be determined.

  In step S6008, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirm whether or not a big hit game is being performed, and if the big hit game is being performed, it is desirable to determine that the hold notice effect is not forcibly executed. It is to be noted that whether or not a big hit game is being performed is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. Can be determined. In addition, you may comprise so that a hold notice effect may be performed even during a big hit game.

  If it is determined that the hold announcement effect is to be performed in any of the modes (Y in step S6009), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the processing target hold storage number addition designation command is the first hold storage number addition designation command. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S6010). If the hold storage number addition designation command to be processed is the first suspension storage number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first suspension display in the first suspension storage display section 9a in the determined suspension notice effect mode. One is increased (step S6011). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the blue, red, or rainbow-colored circular display as the first hold display by one in the first hold storage display unit 9a according to the determination result of step S6008. , Start a pending notice production. Note that, when the step S6011 is executed to start the hold notice effect, the display position of the first hold display to be notified shifts by one as the variable display is started and the first hold display is exhausted one by one. Then, the first hold display to be notified is finally exhausted and erased from the first hold storage display unit 9a, so that the hold notification effect ends (see step S660B).

  In the case where the reserved storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first reserved storage number addition designation command (that is, if it is the second reserved storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 sets the determined suspension notice effect. In this manner, the second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S6012). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the blue, red, or rainbow-colored circular display as the second hold display by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b according to the determination result of step S6008. , Start a pending notice production. Note that, when the step S6012 is executed to start the on-hold notice effect, the display position of the for-notice second hold display shifts by one as the variable display is started and the second on-hold display is exhausted one by one. Then, the second hold display of the notice is finally exhausted and erased from the second hold storage and display section 9b, so that the hold notice effect ends (see step S662B).

  If it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect (N in step S6009), effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the processing target addition of storage number designation command is the first storage number addition designation command. Confirm (step S6013). If the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first reserved display by one in the first reserved storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6014). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  In a case where the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is not the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (that is, the case where the command is the second command for specifying the number of reserved storages), the effect control CPU 101 executes the The second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S6015). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S6016).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001, and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing from step S6002 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas for which the undetermined information is “1”.

  Specifically, when a game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 at the same time, a symbol designation command, a change category command, and a symbol for the start winning at the first start winning opening 13 are provided. A total of six commands including a command set of a first reserved storage number addition designation command, a symbol designation command for a start winning prize in the second startup winning opening 14, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designation command command set May be transmitted within one timer interrupt. In this case, two sets of the start winning command are stored in the start winning command storage area within the one timer interrupt, and the undetermined information is “ 1 ". In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the undetermined information in ascending order of the area numbers among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area, and the undetermined information is “1”. The processing from step S6002 is executed on the command stored in the first storage area as a processing target, and when the processing is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. Next, when returning to step S6001, since the undetermined information of the next storage area is also "1", it is stored in the second storage area where the undetermined information is "1". The processing after step S6002 is executed with the current command as a processing target, and when the processing is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. In other words, when the game balls start and win simultaneously in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, two sets of start winning within one timer interrupt are performed in the suspension notice effect process (1) in step S800B. For the command at the time, a process of determining the presence or absence and the mode of the hold notice effect is performed.

  In step S6017, effect control CPU 101 sets a suspension notice setting restriction flag (step S6017), and starts a suspension notice restriction period.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number addition designation command to be processed is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S6018). If the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first reserved display by one in the first reserved storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6019). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  In a case where the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is not the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (that is, the case where the command is the second command for specifying the number of reserved storages), the effect control CPU 101 performs the processing in the normal manner. The second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S6020). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  It should be noted that when the command to add the number of reserved storages is not received or the command cannot be received normally, it is desirable to skip the processing of steps S6019 and S6020 so as not to increase the number of erroneous reserved displays. Note that, when the command for adding the number of reserved storages is missed or the reception command cannot be normally received, the first reserved display or the second reserved display may be increased by default.

  Further, even after the hold display is incremented by 1 in the normal mode in steps S6019 and S6020, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and stores the undetermined information “1” in the start winning command storage area. Check if the area still exists. Then, the processing from step S6002 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas for which the undetermined information is “1”.

  In step S6021, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (step S6021). If the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first reserved display by one in the first reserved storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6022). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  In a case where the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is not the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (that is, the case where the command is the second command for specifying the number of reserved storages), the effect control CPU 101 performs the processing in the normal manner. The second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S6023). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 increases the green circle display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information of the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S6024). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S6024, the determination is postponed in the later-described reservation notice effect process (2) described below at the timing when the reservation storage is exhausted (the reservation display is shifted). There is a case where the determination of the hold announcement effect for the hold memory is performed and the hold announcement effect is started retrospectively.

  Further, even after the determination postponement information is set in step 6026, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 to determine whether or not there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is "1" in the start winning prize command storage area. Check whether or not. Then, the processing from step S6002 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas for which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the hold announcement effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C). In the hold announcement effect process (2) (the process of determining and executing the hold announcement effect at the timing of releasing the hold memory (shifting the hold display)), the effect control CPU 101 first sets the hold notice setting restriction flag. It is checked whether or not it has been performed (step S6501). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the hold notice restriction period), the flow shifts to step S6506.

  If the suspension notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the suspension notice restriction period), the effect control CPU 101 checks the content of the command at the time of the start winning stored in the command storage area at the time of the start winning. (Step S6502). Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the command at the time of the start winning are stored are in the storage state in which all the commands at the time of the start winning are received in order. (Step S6503).

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, as a command at the time of the start winning, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (a first reservation storage number addition designation command or a second reservation storage number addition designation command) Command) should be received in one timer interrupt at a time. If the command is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data will be received. Commands that are respectively “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any one of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state where a command has been lost due to noise or garbled MODE data. It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbols should be received in the order of the symbol designating command, the fluctuation category command, and the command for adding the number of retained storages (the command for specifying the number of storages to be retained first or the command for adding the number of retained storages). Therefore, if a command is stored in all of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)”. (Or “C1 (H)”). Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, if the order is different (for example, “C6 (H)” is stored before “C4 (H)”), the effect control CPU 101 stores the MODE data. For example, it can be determined that the storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data still remains.

  If there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the received start winning command is determined to be out of order or partly missing, the effect control CPU 101 ends the processing as it is. If it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in the storage state in which all the commands at the time of the start winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storage area at the time of the start winning. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is checked whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S6504). More specifically, when a design 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating an outlier is stored as a design designation command, a variation category 1 command to a variation category 12 command corresponding to the outage are stored as variation category commands. One of them must be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, if the fluctuation category 21 command to the fluctuation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, the sudden change big hit, and the small hit are stored, the effect control CPU 101 It can be determined that the storage area in the storage state in which the content with the category command does not match and is inconsistent still remains.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variable category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 ends the processing as it is. When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent in all the storage areas 1 to 8, the effect control CPU 101 resets the hold notice setting restriction flag. (Step S6505). In other words, in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the command storage area at the time of the start winning, since the command at the time of the start winning is stored normally, the command which has triggered the start of the hold notice restriction period is lost. Then, it is determined that the hold storage in which the inconsistency has occurred has been exhausted, the hold notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the hold notice restriction period ends.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 37 (step S6506). If there is no storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (Y in step S6506), the process ends.

  If there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (N in step S6506), the effect control CPU 101 sends a command stored in the storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1”. It is set as a processing target, and it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined effect is being executed (step S6507). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process in step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6507. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the process ends.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is 0. Is confirmed (step S6508). If the second reserved storage number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved storage), the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved storage), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second special symbol is being changed and displayed (step S6509). Note that whether or not the second special symbol variation display is being performed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the display of the second special symbol is being changed, the process is terminated.

  By executing the processing of steps S6507 to S6509, in this embodiment, the execution of the predetermined effect is still performed even when the hold memory is exhausted (hold display is shifted) after the determination of the hold announcement effect is postponed. If it is in the middle, if there is a second hold memory, or if the change of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is further postponed, and the hold notice effect is restricted. In this embodiment, the holding notice effect process (2) is executed at the timing of holding the storage (shifting the holding display) at the start of the change display of the effect symbol. Since there is no case where a super-reach effect or a super-reach effect is being executed, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a moving object advance effect or a super-reach effect is being executed, and to perform a process of restricting the hold advance effect.

  If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the effect control CPU 101 sets the fluctuation category command of the current processing target (that is, the fluctuation category command in which the determination postponement information stored in the start winning command storage area is set). ), A lottery process is performed using a random number to determine whether or not to perform the hold notice effect, and to determine the effect of the hold notice effect (step S6510). It should be noted that the specific processing content of the determination process of the reserved notice effect in step S6510 is the same as the processing of step S6008 in the reserved notice effect process (1).

  If it is determined that the hold announcement effect is to be executed in any of the modes (Y in step S6511), the effect control CPU 101 sets the hold storage number addition designation command to be processed (that is, in the start winning command storage area). It is checked whether or not the stored deferred storage number addition specifying command in which the stored determination postponement information is set is the first reserved storage number addition specifying command (step S6512). If the command to add the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command to add the number of reserved storages, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first reserved display corresponding to the command to be processed on the first reserved storage display unit 9a. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the mode of the determined advance notice effect (step S6513). Specifically, in response to the determination result of step S6510, effect control CPU 101 causes first hold storage display unit 9a to change the first hold display corresponding to the command to be processed from green circular display to blue, The display is changed to a red or iridescent circle, and a hold announcement effect is started retrospectively.

  In the case where the command for adding the number of reserved storages to be processed is not the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (that is, the second command for adding the number of reserved storages), the effect control CPU 101 In the second hold storage display unit 9b, the display mode of the second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed is changed from the normal display mode to the determined hold notice effect mode (step S6514). Specifically, in response to the result of the determination in step S6510, effect control CPU 101 causes second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed to change from green circle display to blue in second hold storage display unit 9b. The display is changed to a red or iridescent circle, and a hold announcement effect is started retrospectively.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a start prize winning command (symbol designating command) in the storage area of the start prize winning command storage area, which stores a command corresponding to the variation display of the effect symbol to be started this time. , The fluctuation category command, and the command to add the number of reserved storages (the command to add the number of reserved storages or the command to add the number of reserved storages)) and shift the contents of the start winning command storage area (step S6515). ). Specifically, when the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol (in the case of executing the hold announcement effect (2) in step S660C), the storage area of the start winning command storage area Of these, these commands in the first storage area for storing the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation command are deleted, and the subsequent start winning prize command storage areas are stored in the respective storage areas. Shift content. In addition, when the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received at the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol (when the suspension notice effect (2) is executed in step S662C), in the storage area of the start winning command storage area, These commands are deleted from the first storage area for storing the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the second reserved storage number addition designation command, and the contents of the respective storage areas of the subsequent start winning command storage areas are shifted. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect (N in step S6511), the process directly proceeds to step S6516.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the determination postponement information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the determination postponement information to 0 (step S6516).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6506, and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the process from step S6507 is repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas whose determination postponement information is “1”.

  Note that, in this embodiment, when the hold announcement effect is restricted, the determination of the hold announcement effect itself is delayed until the hold memory is consumed (shift of the hold display) (see step S6510). When a prize is won, the process may be performed up to the process of determining the presence or absence of the hold announcement effect and the mode, and only the execution of the hold announcement effect may be delayed until the hold memory is exhausted (shift of the hold display). .

  In the case where only the execution of the hold notice effect is configured to be delayed as described above, if a jackpot has occurred during the restriction of the hold notice effect, the presence or absence of the hold notice effect already determined and the mode of the form It is desirable to cancel the result of the decision and not to execute the hold announcement effect.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag has been set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801) (step S813). Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is also transmitted at the time of restoration from power failure (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. , Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, shifts to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, so the fluctuation of the effect symbol only by receiving the display result designation command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command Display does not start.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol is realized. If a pseudo run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S8002 that a temporary stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo run. , But a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol which is not one of the reach but is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on only the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 45, if the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit” or “2R probability change big hit” (the received display result designation command specifies the display result 2 designation). Command, the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are the same as stop symbols. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be made different depending on whether it is "15R probability variable hit", "10R probability variable hit" or "2R probability variable hit". For example, in the case of "15R probable big hit", the ratio of determining the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number pattern is increased, and in the case of "10R probable big hit" or "2R probable big hit" Alternatively, the ratio of determining the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are aligned with the same even number symbol may be increased.

  Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates “suddenly changing large hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 5 specifying command or the display result 6 specifying command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "missing" (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 1 specifying command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random symbol for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

  In addition, also with respect to the effect symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left middle right is the same symbol) that recalls a big hit is referred to as a large hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds the player of a loss is referred to as a "off symbol".

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 plays a notice effect (a notice effect other than a hold notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a moving object notice effect, a movable object notice effect, and the like as the effect blade during the change display of the effect symbol. A notice effect setting process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect or to set the effect mode of the notice effect (step S8003).

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is configured by data in which a plurality of combinations of a process timer set value, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the effect symbol are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 46 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Further, a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern. If it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In the process table used when performing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. Instead of setting the symbol to be stop-displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-run or the temporary stop symbol in the slide effect. You may.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 generates the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component and the effect component as the effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control such that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol change process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the fluctuation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). In addition, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105). Further, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step S8105, the movable member 78 can be moved by driving the motor 86 when the movable object notice effect is executed, or the effect blade effect object notice effect can be performed. Is performed, by driving the motor 87, the effect of moving the effect blade role objects 79a, 79b is performed. Further, in this embodiment, as described later, even when the super reach effect is executed, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is time to start a movable object announcement effect (step S8106). In addition, whether or not it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the start timing of the movable object announcement effect, the process shifts to step S8108.

  If it is not the start timing of the movable object notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the start timing of the super reach effect has been reached (step S8107). Note that whether or not the super-reach effect start timing has come can be determined by specifically checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the start timing of the super reach effect, the process shifts to step S8111.

  If it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect or the start timing of the super reach effect (Y in step S8106 or Y in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 causes the current first display in the first hold storage display unit 9a to proceed. The display state of the first hold display and the current display state of the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are stored (step S8108). In this embodiment, effect control CPU 101 stores the display states of the first hold display and the second hold display in a hold display state storage area provided in the RAM. Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a pending non-displaying flag indicating that the non-display control for bringing the pending display into the non-display state is being executed (step S8109). Then, effect control CPU 101 erases all the first hold display in first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold display in second hold storage display section 9b, starts the non-display state of the hold display, and starts non-display control. (Step S8110).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the end timing of the movable object announcement effect has come (step S8111). In addition, whether or not the end timing of the movable object notice effect can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If the end timing of the movable object announcement effect has come, the flow shifts to step S8113.

  If it is not the end timing of the movable object announcement effect, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the end timing of the super reach effect has been reached (step S8112). In addition, whether or not the end timing of the super reach effect can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the end timing of the super reach effect, the process shifts to step S8115.

  When it is the end timing of the movable object announcement effect or the end timing of the super reach effect (Y in step S8111 or Y in step S8112), the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag for non-holding display (step S8113). ). The effect control CPU 101 executes a hold display return process of returning the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b to the display state, and performs non-display. The control ends (step S8114).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the hold display return process (step S8114). In the hold display return processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 37 (step S7000). . If there is no information for which the undetermined information is “1” (that is, if a new start winning has not been generated during the non-display control), the effect control CPU 101 stores the hold stored in step S8108 as it is. The first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are returned to the display state of the display (step S7011).

  If there is any information for which the undetermined information is “1” (that is, if a new start winning has occurred during the non-display control), the effect control CPU 101 determines that a new starting winning has occurred. It is checked whether or not the processing has been completed for all the received start prize commands (step S7001). If the processing has been completed for all the commands at the time of the start winning, the processing is ended.

  If there is an unprocessed start winning command, the effect control CPU 101 processes the command stored in the storage area where the undetermined information is “1”, and sets a hold notice setting restriction flag. It is determined whether or not is set (step S7002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag has been set, the flow shifts to step S7006.

  If the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks the content of the command at the time of the start winning of the current processing target, and determines whether or not all the commands at the time of the start winning are received in order. Confirm (step S7003). In step S7003, the effect control CPU 101 executes the same process as step S6003 of the hold announcement effect process (1) to determine whether or not all of the start winning commands have been received in order. .

  If it is determined that the received start prize commands are out of order or partly missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7005. If it is determined that all the commands at the time of the start winning have been received in order, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variable category command match. (Step S7004). At step S7004, effect control CPU 101 executes the same processing as in step S6004 of the hold announcement effect processing (1), so that the contents of the design target command to be processed and the variation category command match. Can be determined. If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7006.

  When it is determined that the command at the time of the start winning is not received in order (N in step S7003), or when it is determined that the contents of the current design target design specification command and the variable category command do not match ( In N) of step S7004, effect control CPU 101 sets a hold notice setting restriction flag (step S7005).

  In step S7006, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the command for specifying the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command for specifying the number of reserved storages (step S7006). If the command to add the number of reserved storages to be processed is the first command to add the number of reserved storages, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first reserved display in a normal manner based on the display state of the reserved display stored in step S8108. The first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are restored in a state where is incremented by one (step S7007).

  If the command to add the number of reserved storages to be processed is not the first command to add the number of reserved storages (that is, if it is the second command to add the number of reserved storages), the effect control CPU 101 stores the reservations stored in step S8108. On the basis of the display state of the display, the first hold display in the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display section 9b in a state where the second hold display is increased by one in a normal manner. Is restored (step S7008).

  However, when executing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008, if there are a plurality of storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information becomes “1”. The first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b at the timing when steps S7007 and S7008 are executed for the command of the storage area to be processed last among the storage areas that are currently processed. To return. For example, when two new start winnings have occurred during the non-display control, when performing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 for the first undetermined command, the hold display stored in step S8108 is executed. Is updated only to the state in which the hold display is increased by one, and when the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 is performed for the second undetermined command, the hold display is further increased by one. (In other words, in a state in which the hold display is increased by two from the display state of the hold display stored in step S8108), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are displayed. The second hold display is restored.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S7009).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information of the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S7010). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S7010, at the timing when the reservation storage is exhausted (the display of the reservation is shifted), the reservation storage that has been postponed in the reservation announcement effect processing (2) is performed. In some cases, the determination of a hold announcement effect is made, and the hold announcement effect is started retrospectively.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S7001, and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing from step S7002 onward is repeatedly executed until the processing for the commands stored in all the storage areas for which the undetermined information is “1” ends.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect design change stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect design fluctuation stop processing, first, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag has been set, the flow shifts to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, when executing the fanfare effect, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag is set, it means that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. The process moves to step S8305 without any processing.

  If the stop symbol display flag has not been set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302). If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, if a lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the command has been set or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit / suddenly changing big hit start designation command has been received is set (step S8305). . If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag if the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set.

  Then, effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speaker 27 as effect component, and movable member 78 as effect component) is effected. The control of the wing actors 79a and 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 43, the variation pattern As soon as the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset. However, for example, since the symbol change designation command is referred to in both the effect control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, at the end of the change, the effect symbol change stop process, etc. It is desirable to reset in the big hit or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process process. In the big hit display process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a special winning opening opening flag indicating that the special winning opening opening designation command has been received is set (step S1901). If the special winning opening opening flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) according to the content of the process data n. The control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25 and 28, etc. is executed (step S1903). For example, an effect of displaying a big hit display symbol on the effect display device 9 and displaying a character or a character indicating that a big hit has occurred is executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, performs switching of process data (step S1905). That is, the process data is switched to the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the special winning opening opening flag is set (Y in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening opening flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the effect during the round. (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805) (step S1910).

  It should be noted that a small hit display process is provided separately from the big hit display process, and in the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (for example, when the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second). For a sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the effect in the same manner as that at the time of sudden change big hit may be performed.

  Further, in the case of a small hit or a sudden change big hit, instead of executing an effect based on the reception of the small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command, the effect control CPU 101, for example, performs a small hit / sudden sudden change big hit. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden change big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches, for each process time, process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden change big hit, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set, for example, based on the confirmation of the reception of the ending command in the processing during the round (see step S805).

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 renders the effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Then, the control of various lamps as effect parts, the speaker 27 as effect parts, and the movable member 78 and effect blade parts 79a and 79b as effect parts are executed (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the big hit or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, if the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a description will be given of a specific example of an effect mode in a case where the suspension notice effect is restricted. FIG. 52 to FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of an effect mode in a case where the hold notice effect is restricted. Among them, FIG. 52 shows a specific example of an effect mode in which the suspended notice effect is restricted because the movable object notice effect is being executed. FIG. 53 shows a specific example of an effect mode in a case where the suspension notice effect is restricted because the super reach effect is being executed. FIG. 54 shows a specific example of an effect mode in a case where the suspension notice effect is restricted due to the presence of the second hold memory or the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, in FIGS. 52 to 54, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), (3),.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of a specific example of an effect mode in a case where the suspended notice effect is restricted because the movable object notice effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 52, one of the first reserved memories is digested from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 52 (1). It is assumed that the effect symbol variation display has started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that it has been determined that the movable object announcement effect is to be executed at the start of the effect symbol change.

  Next, at the start timing of the movable object notice effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are all erased. Then, non-display control is started (see Y in step S8106, S8110). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), control for moving the movable member 78 in the movable object announcement effect is performed (see step S8105).

  Here, when the movable object notice effect is executed and the non-display control is being performed, a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and a command at the time of the new starting winning is transmitted. It shall be assumed. In this case, based on the execution of the movable object notice effect and the non-display control being performed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, and the hold notice effect is restricted (see step S6000).

  Next, at the end timing of the movable object announcement effect (see Y in step S8110), as shown in FIG. 52 (4), one first hold display corresponding to the newly-generated start winning during the non-display control is performed. In a state where the number is increased (in this example, a state where the number of the first hold display is increased from one to two and the number of the first hold display is three), the first hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a is performed. The display and the second hold display in the second hold storage display section 9b are restored (see step S7007).

  Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are stored, one of the first reserved memories is digested to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the variation of the effect symbol is changed. Start display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. Also, at the timing when one first hold storage is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, the determination of the hold announcement effect is performed for the first hold memory in which the determination of the hold advance effect has been postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage in which the determination of the hold notification effect has been postponed and the determination of the hold notification effect has been postponed is determined as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the mode of the determined preliminary announcement effect, and the preliminary announcement effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of a specific example of an effect mode in a case where the suspension notice effect is restricted because the super reach effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 53, one of the first reserved memories is digested from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 53 (1). It is assumed that the effect symbol variation display has started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that a fluctuation pattern including super reach is specified in the fluctuation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the left effect symbol is first stopped and displayed, and then the same symbol as the left effect symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol. As shown in FIG. 53 (3), normal reach occurs.

  Next, at the start timing of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are all erased. , Non-display control is started (see Y in step S8107, S8110). Then, a super reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, in the super reach effect, control for moving the movable member 78 is also performed as shown in FIG. 53 (5) (see step S8105).

  Here, when the super reach effect is executed and the non-display control is being performed, a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 and a command at the time of the new starting winning is transmitted. Shall be. In this case, based on the super reach effect being executed and the non-display control being performed, the determination of the hold advance effect is postponed, and the hold advance effect is restricted (see step S6000).

  Next, at the end timing of the super reach effect (see Y in step S8111), as shown in FIG. 53 (6), the first hold display corresponding to the newly-generated start winning during the non-display control is increased by one. In this state (in this example, the state where the number of the first hold displays is increased from one to two and the number of the first hold displays is three), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a is performed. Then, the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b is restored (see step S7007).

  Then, when the fluctuating time is over, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol is ended.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, one of the first reserved memories is digested to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the variation of the effect symbol is changed. Start display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. Also, at the timing when one first hold storage is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, the determination of the hold announcement effect is performed for the first hold memory in which the determination of the hold advance effect has been postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage in which it is determined that the hold notice effect is to be executed and the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the mode of the determined preliminary announcement effect, and the preliminary announcement effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of a specific example of the production mode in the case where the suspension notice production is restricted because the second reservation storage exists or the second special symbol is being changed and displayed. I do. In the example shown in FIG. 54, one of the first reserved memories is digested from the state where two first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (1) It is assumed that the effect symbol variation display has started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (1), one first hold display is deleted and one first hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display section 9a.

  Next, it is assumed that a start winning is newly generated in the second starting winning opening 14 and a command for a new starting winning is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b, and one second hold display is displayed. In this example, it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect for the newly generated second hold memory, and as shown in FIG. 54 (2), one second hold display is performed in a normal display mode. It is assumed that the state is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in the first start prize port 13 and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the first hold display is increased by one in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In this case, based on the presence of the second hold memory, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, and the hold notice effect is restricted (see step S6006).

  Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), a stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, based on the fact that there is one second reserved memory, the second reserved memory is preferentially digested, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. Start display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), one second hold display is deleted in the second hold storage display section 9b, and there is no second hold display. Also, at the timing when one second holding storage is consumed and the second holding display is shifted, the holding announcement effect processing (2) is executed (see step S662C), but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the fact that it is in the middle, the determination of the pending announcement effect is further postponed, and the advance announcement effect is restricted (see step S6509).

  Next, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in the first start prize port 13 and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the first hold display is increased by one in the first hold storage and display unit 9a, and three first hold displays are displayed. In this case, based on the fact that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the determination of the reserved announcement effect is postponed, and the reserved announcement effect is restricted (see step S6007).

  Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 54 (7), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are stored, one of the first reserved memories is digested to start the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the effect symbol is changed as shown in FIG. Start display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (8), the first hold display unit 9a erases one first hold display and displays two first hold displays. Also, at the timing when one first hold storage is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, the determination of the hold announcement effect is performed for the first hold memory in which the determination of the hold advance effect has been postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect for the first first hold storage generated in FIG. 54 (3), and the second first hold storage generated in FIG. Is determined to execute the hold notice effect, and as shown in FIG. 54 (8), the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the second first hold memory in which the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed Then, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the mode of the determined advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513).

  In this embodiment, a predetermined effect is performed in a predetermined effect execution area 9F, in which a roulette wheel is rotated in response to a normal symbol change display. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the effect mode of the predetermined effect.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation of the effect symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left-center-right effect symbol is stopped (see FIG. 55 (B)). ). At this time, display control (indication effect) such that the image 9A of the character A displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves is executed.

  Next, control (starting effect) for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying "roulette chance") 9B, which is an image for an effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (FIG. 55 ( C)). Then, the information effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect during the predetermined effect is an effect in which the symbol fluctuates in the predetermined effect execution area 9F (an effect in which roulette rotates) (see FIG. 55 (D)). Thereafter, in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, the image 9C indicating that the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball can easily enter is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 55 (E)). Next, a notification image 9D is displayed to notify that the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 55 (F)). After that, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9E (result notification effect) indicating that the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball can easily enter (open state) (FIG. 55 (F)). reference).

  In this embodiment, even when a new starting prize is generated while the predetermined effect is being executed in the mode shown in FIG. 55, the determination of the hold advance effect is postponed, and the hold advance effect is restricted. (See step S6005).

  In the case where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is informed in a mode as shown in FIG. 55 that the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to allow the game balls to easily enter, for example, before displaying the notification result “報” in the predetermined effect. An effect is performed in which the variable prize ball device 15 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and after the variable prize ball device 15 is released for a short time, a mode as shown in FIGS. After displaying the notification result “○”, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long time (in this example, 5.8 seconds × 1 time or 1.8 seconds × 3 times as shown in FIG. 19). It may be. Further, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for a long time after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a short time simultaneously with the display of the notification result “報”. By doing so, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is implicitly opened for a short time immediately before the variable prize ball device 15 is released for a long time, so that the player can clearly recognize the opening timing of the variable prize ball device 15. be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, before the start condition is satisfied (in the present example, at the time of starting winning), the predetermined information (in this example, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the variation pattern type). Based on the random number), it is determined in advance whether or not the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a specific display result (big hit symbol). Then, based on the result of the look-ahead determination, a hold announcement effect is executed. In this case, if a new starting prize is generated while a notice effect (predetermined effect, movable object notice effect in this example) of the notice effects is being performed during the change display of the effect symbol, the pre-read determination is made. Regardless of the result, the execution of the pending announcement effect is restricted for the starting prize until the announcement effect ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the pending announcement effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the announcement effect, and improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a new start winning is generated when a specific reach effect (in this example, a super reach effect) of the reach effects is performed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbols, Restricts the execution of the hold notice effect for the start winning prize until the specific reach effect ends, regardless of the result of the pre-reading determination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold announcement effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  Note that, in this embodiment, of the periods in which the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the hold announcement effect is limited in the case where a new start winning is generated during the period in which the announcement effect or the specific reach effect is being executed. The case (that is, during the period before and after the notice effect or the specific reach effect is executed in the period in which the effect symbol change display is executed, the case where the suspended notice effect can be executed) is shown. However, the period for restricting the pending announcement effect is not limited to the period described in this embodiment. For example, in the entire period in which the effect display and the fluctuation display of the effect design accompanied by the specific reach effect are performed, the hold advance effect is uniformly restricted (even if the hold advance effect is not performed at all for the limited hold memory, the following A hold announcement effect may be executed after the fluctuation display). In addition, for example, prior to a notice effect or a specific reach effect, a suggestive effect indicating a notice effect or a specific reach effect (for example, an effect of turning a display screen into a black screen (blackout), or promoting a super reach) In the case where the effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the suspension notice effect is restricted from the time when the suggested effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the hold announcement effect is executed at a specific timing (in this example, when a start winning prize occurs), and when the second hold storage is stored at the specific timing, Restrict the execution of the pending announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where the possibility of the specific game state (in this example, the jackpot game state) is stocked, and to prevent the gambling property from becoming unnecessarily high. That is, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if the holding notice effect is executed for the first holding memory while the second holding memory is stored, It is recognized that there is a possibility that the first hold storage whose execution is postponed will be a big hit. Then, in a state where the first hold memory that may become a big hit is stocked, the game is executed by the change display of the second special symbol, and it is possible to aim for a continuous big hit, and gambling is more than necessary May be higher. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a state where the second hold storage is stored, the hold announcement effect is restricted, thereby preventing the gambling property from becoming unnecessarily high.

  In this embodiment, as a specific timing, the determination and execution of the hold announcement effect are performed at the timing when the start winning prize is generated (however, after the hold announcement effect is restricted, the hold memory is exhausted (shift of the hold display is performed). ), The determination and execution of the hold announcement effect are performed), but the specific timing is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of determining and executing the hold announcement effect at the timing of the start winning prize, the determination and execution of the hold announcement effect are performed at a specific timing when the hold memory is consumed (shift of the hold display). It may be performed. Further, for example, the determination and execution of the hold announcement effect may be performed assuming that the specific timing is reached when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the occurrence of the start winning prize.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the hold announcement effect is restricted, at the timing when the hold memory is exhausted (the hold display is shifted), the determination is postponed unless the second hold memory is present and the second special symbol is not being changed and displayed. The case where the judgment and the execution of the holding notice effect are performed with respect to the first holding memory that has been performed is shown, but the holding notice effect is performed because the second holding memory is stored or the second special symbol is being changed and displayed. May be configured such that the hold announcement effect is not executed at all for the first hold memory.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a display for a hold announcement effect different from a normal display mode (in this example, a green circle display) on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. By displaying the hold display in a mode (in this example, a blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display), the hold announcement effect is executed at a specific timing. In addition, based on the establishment of the predetermined non-display condition (in this example, the execution of the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect), the hold display is disabled in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. A non-display control for setting the display state is executed, and the display for setting the hold display in the first hold storage display section 9a or the second hold storage display section 9b based on the release of the satisfaction of the predetermined non-display condition. Execute control. In addition, when the non-display control is being executed at a specific timing, the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted, and after the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted, the non-display control is terminated and the display control is executed. The hold display is displayed in a normal display mode. Therefore, when the display control is shifted from the non-display control to the display control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the hold announcement effect is already executed, and to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the case in which the hold announcement effect is executed by making the display mode of the hold display different from the normal display manner has been described, but the form of the hold announcement effect is described in this embodiment. It is not limited to things. For example, in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b, a hold announcement effect may be executed in such a manner that a character or the like is displayed on the hold display. Further, for example, by outputting a specific sound effect from the speaker 27 in response to a winning start, or by rotating a fan or the like, a predetermined portion of the gaming machine (for example, an operation means (for example, an operation button, an operation of a control stick shape, A hold announcement effect may be executed by generating a wind from the vicinity of the means) or by vibrating the operation means provided in the gaming machine.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the non-display control is executed by deleting the hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, even if non-display control is executed by hiding the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b by moving a movable member provided in the gaming machine. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is set to the non-display state. However, not only the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen but also a hold storage display provided in an area other than the liquid crystal display screen (for example, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a or the second special symbol hold display). Non-display control may be performed by hiding the storage display 18b) with a movable member such as a cover.

  Further, in this embodiment, of the cases where the holding notice effect is restricted in the case where a new start winning is generated during the period during which the non-display control is executed, during the period in which the effect symbol change display is being executed (ie, , During the period in which the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the period before and after the non-display control is executed indicates the case where the suspension announcement effect can be executed). The time limit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in all periods in which the effect of the display design is changed by the notice effect or the specific reach effect in which the display pattern is changed (the hold notice effect is not performed at all for the limited hold memory). Alternatively, the hold announcement effect may be executed after the next fluctuation display). Further, for example, in the case where a suggestion effect indicating the non-display control is performed prior to the non-display control (for example, a selection effect of the reach, or a next notice effect indicating that the movable object notice effect is to be executed next time), Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the suspension notice effect is restricted from the time when the suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is moved at a specific timing, the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold announcement effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the movement of the movable member 78, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, of the case where the holding notice effect is limited in a case where a start winning is newly generated during a period in which the movable member 78 is being moved during a period in which the effect symbol change display is being performed (that is, In the period in which the effect symbol variation display is being executed, the period before and after the movable member 78 is moved indicates that the suspension notice effect can be executed). The time limit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold announcement effect is uniformly restricted in all periods in which the effect design with the movement of the movable member 78 is displayed (the next change is made even if the hold advance effect is not performed for the limited hold memory at all). A hold announcement effect may be executed after the display). Further, for example, prior to the movement of the movable member 78, a suggestion effect suggesting that the movable member 78 can move (for example, a dialogue announcement effect suggesting that the movable member 78 can move, or a development to a super reach involving the movement of the movable member 78) When a suggestion effect is executed, the pending announcement effect may be limited from the point in time when the suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at a specific timing, a predetermined restriction condition (in this example, when a predetermined effect is being executed, when a movable object announcement effect is being executed, or when a super reach effect is being executed) , If there is a second hold memory, and if the second special symbol is being changed), the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted, and the execution timing is different from the specific timing. (In this example, when the hold memory is consumed and the hold display is shifted), a hold announcement effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the hold announcement effect at an optimal timing, to pay attention to the hold announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that a specific timing is at the timing when the start winning prize is generated, and when the suspension notice effect is restricted at the specific timing, the suspension storage is performed as an execution timing different from the specific timing. The case where the hold announcement effect is executed at the timing when the hold display is shifted and the hold display is shifted, that is, the case where the hold announcement effect is executed at the execution timing after a specific timing after restricting the hold announcement effect, has been described. Not limited to such a case, for example, as an execution timing different from the specific timing, the hold announcement effect may be executed at a timing before the specific timing. For example, as described above, in a case in which the hold announcement effect is executed at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the occurrence of the start winning prize, the hold announcement effect is executed, until the specific timing is reached. It can be known in advance whether or not a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Therefore, when it is known in advance that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, the hold announcement effect may be executed before the specific timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a predetermined effect is being executed, when a movable object notice effect is being executed, when a super reach effect is being executed, when there is a second hold memory, a second special While a case is shown in which the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the hold announcement effect is restricted, but the predetermined restriction condition is not limited to that described in this embodiment. For example, assuming that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied even in a state in which the variable display is not performed, such as when various error notifications are performed (the variable display may not be performed even during the execution of the predetermined effect). Alternatively, the hold announcement effect may be restricted.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the change display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the change display of the first special symbol, and the second start winning opening 13 is in the first state (variable) in which the game ball easily passes. The control can be performed in a state where the winning ball device 15 is open) and a second state where the game ball is difficult to pass (the closed state of the variable winning ball device 15). Then, as an announcement effect, a predetermined effect notifying that the second starting winning opening 14 is controlled to the first state is executed, and based on the execution of the predetermined effect, the reserved announcement effect is restricted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where it is recognized that there is a possibility that the specific game state may be present in the first hold memory, and the gambling property becomes higher than necessary. Can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a movable object announcement effect of moving the movable member 78 is executed as the announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention degree of the movable member 78 from being lowered, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the pending announcement effect is limited when a predetermined effect or a movable object announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect, but the announcement effect is the same as that described in this embodiment. I can't. For example, as a notice effect, when a re-lottery effect is performed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, or when an intense heat notice effect (for example, a group notice effect or a background notice effect) is executed, a fanning notice effect ( For example, if the pseudo-run is continued, whether or not it will develop into a super-reach, or whether or not it will develop into a chance, the effect will be limited to the pending announcement effect. You may.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the specific reach effect, a super reach effect involving the movement of the movable member 78 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention degree of the movable member 78 from being lowered, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the occurrence of the start winning, a pre-read determination is made as to whether or not the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a specific display result, and the pre-read determination is performed. Sometimes, when a notice effect or a specific reach effect is executed, when the second hold storage is stored, when the non-display control is executed, or when the movable member 78 is moved, After the notice effect or the specific reach effect ends, after the second hold memory is not stored, after the non-display control ends, and after the movable member 78 stops moving, the specific conditions (this example Then, the hold announcement effect is executed based on the fact that the hold memory is exhausted and the hold display is shifted. Therefore, by delaying the execution timing of the hold announcement effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold advance effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the advance effect and the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, after the hold notice effect is restricted, as a specific condition, based on the timing to use the hold memory and shift the hold display, the hold notice for which the determination has been postponed has been postponed. Although the case where the effect is determined and executed is shown, the specific conditions are not limited to those described in this embodiment. For example, based on the fact that the second hold memory has disappeared, or that the symbol for designating has been received and the stop symbol of the effect symbol has been determined, and that the next variation display has been started after receiving the variation pattern command, It may be configured that, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the determination and the execution of the hold announcement effect are performed for the hold storage whose determination has been postponed. Further, for example, the determination and the execution of the hold announcement effect may be performed immediately at the timing when the announcement effect and the specific reach effect have been completed. It may be configured to determine and execute the hold announcement effect at the timing when (second) has elapsed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the number of first hold storages decreases, a hold announcement effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the hold notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a specific reach effect (super-reach effect in this example) among the reach effects is being executed, the non-display control is executed assuming that a predetermined non-display condition is satisfied. Therefore, attention can be paid to the specific reach effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the non-display control is executed assuming that the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied when the movable object announcement effect for moving the movable member 78 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to a movable object announcement effect that causes the movable member 78 to move, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the non-display control is executed on the assumption that the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied based on the execution of the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect. Are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be configured that the non-display control is executed based on the fact that the predetermined effect is being executed and the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member 78 is provided near the effect display device 9 (image display device) provided in the gaming machine, and the movable member 78 is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). It is moved in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the movable member 78 that can move in a manner overlapping the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device) can be noticed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is provided near the effect display device 9 (image display device), and the movable member 78 is moved, so that the movable member 78 is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). Although the case where 78 overlaps (makes it hard to see by covering the display screen) is shown, it is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the movable member is provided at a position different from the effect display device 9 (image display device), and even if the movable member moves, the movable member does not overlap the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). It may not affect the visual recognition state of the display screen at all. Also, for example, the movable member may be provided on the game frame side.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that the movable member 78 is being moved, the execution of the hold announcement effect is limited assuming that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the time when the movable member 78 is being moved, and to execute the hold announcement effect at an optimal timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the execution of the predetermined effect, the execution of the hold announcement effect is limited assuming that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the time when the predetermined effect is being executed, and to execute the suspension notice effect at an optimal timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution of the hold announcement effect may be restricted by prohibiting the execution of the hold advance effect. In this case, for example, the hold announcement effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C) executed when the hold memory is exhausted (shift of the hold display) is not provided, and the hold announcement effect is not retroactively executed. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the execution of the pending announcement effect is completely prohibited, thereby maintaining the attention to the announcement effect and the specific reach effect, preventing the gambling property from becoming unnecessarily high, and moving. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold announcement effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the movement of the member, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for game control determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type when a start winning is generated, and stores the first hold storage or the change pattern. Sending the reserved storage information (in this example, a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number addition designation command) so as to be able to recognize that the second reserved storage has increased, And determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variation category command) indicating the determination result of the large hit type and the variation pattern type. If at least one of the hold storage information and the determination result information cannot be normally received, the execution of the hold announcement effect is controlled. To. Therefore, it can be prevented that accidentally not based on the determination result of the pre-read determination result in run held informational display, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reliability of the pending announcement attraction.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is executed as the suggestive effect based on the pre-reading determination result has been described. However, for example, a continuous notice effect other than the hold notice effect (“change in the variation form at the time of symbol change” or A continuous announcement effect in the mode of “mode transition” or “countdown” may be configured to be executable. Then, in the case where such a continuous announcement effect is configured to be executable, if any of the pending storage information or the determination result information cannot be normally received according to the same processing as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be limited.

  Further, according to this embodiment, if the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variable category command) transmitted based on one hold storage cannot be normally received, The execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted until the fluctuation display based on the hold memory is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension notice effect from being inconsistent and reduce the reliability of the suspension notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted from the time when the command is missed or inconsistent to the time when the hold memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent occurs is consumed. As shown above, the execution of the hold announcement effect is limited only to the hold memory where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the time of the start winning prize is normally applied to the hold memory that occurs after that. As long as the command has been received, the execution of the hold announcement effect may not be restricted even before the hold storage in which the command is missed or inconsistent has been consumed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a process of checking the hold notice setting restriction flag in step S6002 of the hold notice effect process (1), a process of checking the hold notice setting restriction flag in step S7002 of the hold display return process, The processing of steps S6501 to S6505 of the notice effect processing (2) becomes unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is described in which the determination of the hold announcement effect itself is not performed when a command is missed or inconsistency occurs, but the determination of the hold advance effect itself is performed. , May be restricted. For example, if the command missing or inconsistency is detected in the determination processing of steps S6003 to S6004 in the suspension notice effect processing (1), the processing of step S6017 is executed to set the suspension notice setting restriction flag, while the step S6003 is performed. Regardless of the determination result of S6004 or the presence or absence of the hold notice setting restriction flag, the process of determining the hold notice effect in step S6008 may be always executed. If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the hold display may be displayed in a normal manner regardless of the determination result in S6008, so that the hold notice effect is not executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined as the determination result information, a symbol designation command capable of specifying the determination result of the big hit type, and a predetermined designating command. A variable category command that can specify whether or not the state (in this example, super reach) is set is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the hold announcement effect even when the judgment result specified by the received symbol designating command and the judgment result specified by the received fluctuation category command are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the pending announcement effect from deteriorating because the on-hold announcement effect cannot be matched.

  Further, according to this embodiment, production control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the suspension notice production even when the reservation storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in a regular order. For this reason, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the hold announcement effect from being lowered.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the game is controlled to be in a surely changed state (high probability state) after the big hit game ends, and a predetermined number of times (in this example, 71 times) after the big hit game ends A case has been described in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that ends the probable change state (high-probability state) based on the termination of the display. However, such a gaming machine to which the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied is It is not limited to machines. For example, in this embodiment, a gaming machine provided with a normal jackpot controlled only in a high base state (time saving state) in addition to a probability variable jackpot controlled as a jackpot type after a jackpot game is completed is shown in this embodiment. A configuration for setting and executing the hold announcement effect, and a configuration for restricting the setting and execution of the hold advance effect may be applied. In this case, for example, in the case of a probability change big hit, the probability change state may be controlled after the big hit game is ended, and the probability change state may be continued until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when a normal big hit occurs, the high base state (time saving state) is controlled after the big hit game ends, and the high base state is set at the timing when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is ended after the big hit game ends. (Time saving state) may be ended. Further, in a case where such a gaming machine is configured to provide a sudden change big hit or a small hit suddenly, it is in a high base state in order to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the gaming machine has been controlled to a certain change state (high probability state). When suddenly a sudden change jackpot occurs, after the big hit game based on the sudden change jackpot is completed, the state is controlled to the high probability state and the high base state is maintained, and when the low base state is reached, the sudden change sudden jackpot occurs. In this case, it is desirable to control only the high probability state after the big hit game based on the sudden change big hit and not to control the high base state (maintain the low base state).

Embodiment 2 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the process of the pre-reading determination (see steps S1217A and S1217B) itself is executed when a new starting prize is generated, so that a predetermined effect is being executed or a movable object announcement effect is performed. In the case of being executed, in the case where the super reach effect is being executed, in the case where there is the second hold memory, or in the case where the change of the second special symbol is being displayed, the judgment of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is performed. Although the case of restricting is shown, the process of the pre-reading determination itself may be postponed to limit the hold announcement effect. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a second embodiment in which the processing of the pre-reading determination itself is postponed to restrict the hold notice effect.

  In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in this embodiment, in the first starting port switch passage processing, the prize-winning effect processing of step S1217A shown in the first embodiment is not performed, and the game control microcomputer is used. The pre-reading determination process is not performed on the 560 side. In this embodiment, instead of the symbol designating command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the random R (big hit determination random number) extracted in step S1214A. Control for transmitting the set random number command for jackpot determination (step S1218a), and control for transmitting the random number command for fluctuation pattern type determination in which the value of the random number for randomness pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in step S1214A is set. Is performed (step S1219a). The processes in steps S1211A to S1216A and S1220A are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), in this embodiment, in the second starting port switch passing process, the prize-winning effect process of step S1217B shown in the first embodiment is not performed, and the game control The microcomputer 560 does not perform the pre-reading determination process. Further, in this embodiment, instead of the symbol designating command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the random R (big hit determination random number) extracted in step S1214B. Control for transmitting the set random number command for jackpot determination (step S1218b), and control for transmitting the random number command for variation pattern type determination in which the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in step S1214B is set. Is performed (step S1219b). The processing in steps S1211B to S1214B and S1220B is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the hold announcement effect process (1) (step S800B) in the second embodiment. In the hold announcement effect process (1), the processes in steps S6000 to S6002 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment.

  Next, if the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set in step S6002, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command at the time of the start prize of the current processing target, and receives all the commands at the time of the start prize in order. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (step S6003a). Note that the basic determination method in step S6003a is the same as step S6003 shown in the first embodiment, but in step S6003a, the effect control CPU 101 uses the symbol designation shown in the first embodiment. In place of the command and the variation category command, a large hit determination random number command, a variation pattern type determination random number command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reservation storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number addition designation command) It is determined whether all three commands have been received in order.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted / received, the determination processing in step S6004 shown in the first embodiment is not performed.

  Next, the processes in steps S6005 to S6007 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not being performed (N in step S6007), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the random number for the jackpot determination specified by the random number command for the jackpot determination and the random number command for the variation pattern type determination. Based on the value of the specified variation pattern type determination random number, a winning effect process is executed, and a prefetch determination process is performed (step S6008a). Note that the basic processing content of the prize-winning effect processing in step S6008a is the same as the processing in steps S1217A and S1217B described in the first embodiment.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the pending announcement effect is to be generated based on the determination result of step S6008a (specifically, the determination result as to whether the fluctuation category is non-reach, super-reach is lost, or a super-reach big hit). A lottery process is performed using random numbers to determine the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode, and the presence / absence of the hold announcement effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6008b).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even if a new starting winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting winning by executing the process of step S6000, the moving object notice effect and the super reach effect are being executed. When the non-display control is being performed, the pre-reading determination process itself is postponed so that the holding notice effect is not immediately started, and the holding notice effect is restricted.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S6005 to S6007, even if a new start winning is generated and a command is received at the time of starting win, a predetermined effect is being executed, In the case where there is the 2nd hold memory, and when the change display of the second special symbol is being performed, the process of the pre-reading determination itself is postponed so that the hold advance announcement effect is not immediately started, and the hold advance effect is limited.

  Note that the processing after step S6009 is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the hold announcement effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C) in the second embodiment. In the hold announcement effect process (2), the processes of steps S6501 to S6502 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the command at the time of the start winning are stored are in the storage state in which all the commands at the time of the start winning are received in order. (Step S6503a). Note that the basic determination method in step S6503a is the same as step S6503 shown in the first embodiment, but in step S6503a, the effect control CPU 101 executes the symbol designation shown in the first embodiment. In place of the command and the variation category command, in all of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a big hit determination random number command, a variation pattern type determination random number command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved) It is determined whether or not all three commands (the storage number addition designation command or the second reserved storage number addition designation command) are in the storage state in which they are all received in order.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted / received, the determination processing in step S6504 shown in the first embodiment is not performed.

  Next, the processing in steps S6505 to S6509 is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  Next, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not being performed (N in step S6509), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the random number for big hit determination specified by the random number command for big hit determination and the random number command for fluctuation pattern type determination. Based on the value of the specified random number for fluctuation pattern type determination, the prize-winning effect processing is executed, and the pre-reading determination processing is performed (step S6510a). The basic processing content of the winning effect processing of step S6510a is the same as the processing of steps S1217A and S1217B shown in the first embodiment.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to hold the preliminary announcement effect based on the determination result of step S6510a (specifically, the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation category is non-reach, super-reach is lost, or a super-reach big hit). A lottery process is performed using random numbers to determine the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode, and the presence / absence of the hold announcement effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6510b).

  Note that the processing after step S6511 is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a notice effect or a reach effect is being executed based on the occurrence of a start winning prize, and a notice effect (in this example, a predetermined effect When it is determined that a movable object notice effect) or a specific reach effect (in this example, a super reach effect) is executed, or when the second hold storage is stored, the non-display control is executed. In this case, after the notice effect or the specific reach effect ends, or after the second hold memory is not stored, after the non-display control ends, the movable member 78 is moved. Based on the fact that the specific condition (in this example, the holding memory is exhausted and the holding display is shifted) is satisfied when the movement of the movable member 78 is completed, the display result of the effect design change display becomes the specific display result. Look-ahead judgment of whether or not To run. Therefore, by delaying the determination timing of the pre-reading determination, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the reserved advance effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the advance effect and the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, a movable member 78 that is movable from the outside of the effect display device 9 (image display device) so as to overlap the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in a movable object notice effect or a super reach effect. Although the case where the movable member is moved is shown, the movable member that is moved in the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect is not limited to such a member, and the movable member does not overlap the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 9 even if it moves. You may. For example, in a movable object announcement effect or a super reach effect, a moving member provided on a game frame side of a gaming machine may be moved. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a third embodiment in which a movable member provided on a game frame side of a gaming machine is moved in a movable object notice effect or a super reach effect.

  In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 59 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 59 with the glass door frame opened. As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, in this embodiment, rotatable movable LED units 200L and 200R are provided above and below the game frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the movable LED units 200L and 200R can change from the first state to the second state by moving in a rotating manner.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for describing a movable mode of the movable LED units 200L and 200R. 61A shows a sectional view taken along the line AA in the first state of the movable LED units 200L and 200R when cut along the plane AA in FIG. FIG. 61 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the movable LED units 200L and 200R taken along the line AA in the second state when viewed along the plane AA in FIG. FIG. 61C is a perspective view of the movable LED units 200L and 200R as viewed from obliquely above, and FIG. 61D is a front view of the movable LED units 200L and 200R as viewed from the front. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the movable LED units 200L and 200R are provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass door frame 102 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 201 that is oriented in the left-right direction. A circular first light emitting surface 202A formed by notching in parallel with the rotation axis 201 near the rotation axis 201 passing through the center, and an opposite of the first light emission surface 202A with respect to the rotation axis 201. And a circular second light emitting surface 202B formed by notching in a direction intersecting the rotation shaft 201 on the side.

  More specifically, the second light emitting surface 202B is formed to have a smaller area than the first light emitting surface 202A, and to face slightly inward when the first light emitting surface 202A faces the back. The first light-emitting surface 202A is formed of a flat lens member (not shown) having a light-transmitting property, and diffuses light of the plurality of first LEDs 203a provided inside the main body and emits the light outward. I have. On the other hand, the second light emitting surface 202B is formed of a non-translucent plate, and has a plurality of (five in this embodiment) through holes 204 formed therein. The two LEDs 203b are arranged so as to face each other, and function as spotlights.

  The movable LED units 200L and 200R thus configured in a hemispherical shape are rotatable about a rotary shaft 201 in hemispherical concave portions 102b formed on the upper left and right sides of the front surface 102a of the glass door frame 102, respectively. Is housed in One of the rotating shafts 201 protruding to the right and left is connected to the LED motor 205, and the rotating shaft 201 is rotated around the axis by the LED motor 205, so that the first light emitting surface is flat. It is possible to change (rotate) between a first state in which 202A faces the front side (see FIG. 61A) and a second state in which the second light emitting surface 202B faces the front side (see FIG. 61B). ing.

  In the first state, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R are housed in the recesses 102b, and the first light emitting surface 202A faces the front and the second light emitting surface 202B faces the front surface 102b. Are disposed so as to be substantially flush with the front surface 102a. That is, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R do not protrude from the front surface 102a.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R deviate from the concave portions 102b, and the second light emitting surface 202B faces forward and the first light emitting surface 202A faces rearward. Is provided such that the front end portion of the spherical surface having the length L1 protrudes from the front surface 102a by a predetermined length.

  Further, in the second state, the second light-emitting surfaces 202B of the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R face slightly inward, respectively, so that the upper plate 3 located at the lower center of the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R. The area around the push button 250 on the upper surface 3a can be locally illuminated or vertically reciprocated.

  In this embodiment, a mode in which the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R are rotated in place of the movable member 78 shown in the first embodiment when a movable object notice effect or a super reach notice effect is executed. And control is performed to change from the first state shown in FIG. 61 (A) to the second state shown in FIG. 1 (B).

  In this embodiment, the push button 250 provided on the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 is also configured to be movable, and functions as a kind of movable member. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a movable mode of the push button 250. 62A shows the initial position of the push button 250, FIG. 62B shows the first position of the push button 120, and FIG. 62C shows the initial position of the push button 250. At the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the push button 250 is configured so as to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player, and has a position inside the main body of the upper plate 3 at the installation position of the push button 250. , A button switch (not shown) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 250 is provided.

  The push button 250 is provided such that the operation surface 250b, which is the top surface, protrudes by a predetermined height from the upper surface 3a, which is the installation surface of the push button 250.

  Although not particularly shown, the push button 250 includes a base body provided inside the main body of the upper plate 3 and a bottomed cylindrical moving body provided to be vertically movable with respect to the base body. When the operation surface 250b formed on the moving body is pressed, the operation is detected by the button switch 250a. That is, the operation surface 250b is movable between an initial position where the operation surface 250b slightly protrudes from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 62A) and a pressing position (not shown) below the initial position. And is always maintained at the initial position by the urging force of a spring (not shown).

  The moving body of the push button 250 is moved up and down by a button motor (not shown) and a driving force transmission mechanism (not shown). Specifically, an initial position where the operation surface 250b slightly protrudes from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 62A), and a second position where the operation surface 250b protrudes largely from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 62C). ) Can be moved up and down. Further, a mechanism is provided which can stop the elevating operation at an arbitrary position between the initial position and the second position and detect a pressing operation at a pressing position (not shown) by a button switch.

  Further, in the present example, while moving from the initial position to the second position, it passes through a first position (see FIG. 62 (B)) which is a substantially intermediate position between the initial position and the second position. For example, the effect content may be changed depending on whether the push button 250 is operated when in the initial position, the first position, or the second position.

  Note that the first position and the second position are different from the pressing position located below the initial position, and are movable positions located in the direction (upper) opposite to the pressing operation direction (downward) with respect to the initial position. It is an operation position where the pressing operation can be performed similarly to the initial position. That is, the initial position is an initial operation position, the first position is a first operation position, and the second position is a second operation position.

  The protrusion height of the operation surface 250a of the push button 250 with respect to the upper surface 3a of the upper plate 3 is higher at the protrusion height L10 at the first position than at the initial position, and is higher at the second position than at the first position. L11 is higher (L10 <L11). Although the first position is set at a substantially intermediate position between the initial position and the second position, the first position may be closer to the initial position or closer to the second position.

  Then, when the movable object notice effect or the super reach notice effect is executed, the push button 120 is made to move, and for example, when the push button 250 is in any of the initial position, the first position, and the second position, the operation is performed. The effect contents may be different depending on whether they have done it.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the movable members (in this example, the movable LED units 200L and 200R, the push button 120) are provided in the game frame of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the movable member provided in the game frame of the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In addition, as the movable member provided in the game frame, a movable member provided with a display unit on which the content of the game value given to the player (for example, the provision of a bonus) may be provided. According to such a configuration, the content of the game value displayed on the movable member can be noticed, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the first embodiment, after a hold announcement effect is restricted when a new starting prize is generated, a predetermined effect is still being executed even when the hold memory is consumed (shift of the hold display), In the case where there is the second hold memory, and in the case where the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the case where the hold announcement effect is further restricted has been described. Even if the effect is being executed, if there is a second hold memory, or if the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, if the number of times of the hold notice effect reaches the upper limit number, the hold notice will be given. The effect may be determined and executed. Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment in which an upper limit is set to the number of times of the suspension notice effect will be described.

  In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the hold announcement effect process (1) (step S800B) in the fourth embodiment. Note that, in the hold announcement effect process (1), the processes in steps S6000 to S6026 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the determination postponement information is set in step S6024, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the determination postponement number counter for postponing the determination of the reservation advance production and counting the number of times the suspension advance production is restricted ( Step S6024A).

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are flowcharts showing the hold announcement effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C) in the fourth embodiment. Note that, in the hold announcement effect process (2), the processes of steps S6501 to S6509 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the predetermined effect is being executed (Y in step S6507), when the second reserved storage number is not 0 (N in step S6508), or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being displayed (Y in step S6509). In), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the determination postponement counter (step S6509A). Then, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the postponed determination postponement number counter is 3 or more (step S6509B). If the value of the determination postponement number counter after the addition is not 3 or more, the processing is terminated as it is. If the value of the determination postponement number counter after the addition is 3 or more, the flow shifts to step S6510, and if the predetermined effect is still being executed, or if there is the second hold memory, the second special symbol Even in the case of the variable display, the process proceeds to the process of determining and executing the hold announcement effect.

  The processing in steps S6510 to S6516 is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the determination postponement information is cleared in step S6516, the effect control CPU 101 clears the value of the determination postponement number counter (step S6516A).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is provided with a determination postponement number counter separately for each hold display, and separately counts up the determination postponement number counter for each hold display to limit the number of times of the suspension notice effect. It is desirable to manage

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied at a specific timing and the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted, the predetermined condition is satisfied at an execution timing different from the specific timing. In this case, the execution of the hold announcement effect is further restricted, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied at a specific timing and the execution of the hold announcement effect is restricted, the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is a predetermined number of times (in this example, (3 times), a hold announcement effect is executed regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the hold storage is exhausted without executing the hold announcement effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which circuits for controlling the effect devices are mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a first effect control board on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards including two effect control boards may be provided.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 uses another board (for example, FIG. 3 or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control unit such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control unit receives the command. In response to this, control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 by changing the received command as it is or, for example, to a simplified command. May be transmitted. Even in this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In addition, the configuration for executing the continuous announcement effect or the hold announcement effect as the suggestion effect described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to various types of gaming machines, not limited to pachinko gaming machines. For example, the configuration for executing the continuous announcement effect and the hold announcement effect described in each of the above embodiments may be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine. In a sealed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in an enclosed area (for example, in a pachinko machine), and a game area provided in the pachinko machine is provided. In order to fire a game ball through the game area, collect the game ball via the collection area (for example, each winning opening, out port, foul ball return port), and then fire the collected game ball again in the game area. In the enclosed area. Further, in such a closed-loop pachinko machine, when a prize is won in each winning opening, a point corresponding to the number of prize balls is added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the prize ball. Processing is performed. In such an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, when the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is applied, and when a variation display of an effect symbol is performed on the effect display device of the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a hold notice effect is executed. By performing the same processing as in each of the above-described embodiments, when a predetermined effect is being executed, or when a movable object announcement effect is being executed, a super-reach effect is being executed. In this case, if there is a second hold memory, and if the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the hold notice effect may not be started immediately, and the hold notice effect may be limited.

  Here, in the above embodiment, the following control may be further performed.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit occurs after the variable display based on the change pattern ends, whether or not to shift to the positive change state, and whether the received change pattern command A notice effect is performed at a plurality of execution timings during the variable display, which indicates whether or not a big hit will occur after the variable display is completed, in accordance with the corresponding fluctuation time or the like.

  As the execution timing of the notice effect, the timing t1 at which the variation of the effect symbol is started, the timing t2 from the start of the variation of the effect symbol to the reach mode, and the reach effect is executed after the reach mode is displayed. There is a timing t3 up to the start, and a timing t4 from the start of the execution of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol as a display result.

  At the timing t1, a sound announcement effect by sound for starting variable display is executed. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a normal sound effect that outputs a normal start sound at the start of the variable display and a specific sound effect that outputs a specific start sound at the start of the variable display, depending on whether or not a big hit occurs. And a special sound effect that outputs a special start sound at the start of the variable display. Here, when the specific sound effect is executed, a big hit occurs at a rate of 20% after the variable display ends, and when a special sound effect is executed, a big hit occurs at a rate of 50% after the variable display ends. , The sound announcement effect is executed.

  At timing t2, a character announcement effect of displaying a character image and displaying a predetermined sentence as a line of the character image is executed. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to perform a line effect depending on whether or not a jackpot is to be achieved, and selects a sentence displayed as a line when executing a line effect. A plurality of types of sentences displayed as dialogue are stored, and each is selected so that the rate of a big hit after the variable display ends is different. For example, a weak serif sentence that becomes a big hit at a rate of 20% after the variable display ends, a medium serif sentence that gets a big hit at a rate of 50% after the variable display ends, and a rate of 70% after the variable display ends A strong dialogue sentence that is a big hit is stored.

  At timing t3, a group announcement effect of moving and displaying a plurality of mini-character images smaller than the symbol image on the front side of the reach mode is executed. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a group announcement effect is to be executed depending on whether or not a big hit occurs, and selects the type of the mini-character image when the effect is to be executed. A plurality of types of mini-character images to be displayed in the group announcement effect are stored, and each is selected so that the ratio of the big hit after the variable display ends is different. For example, a normal mini-character image that has a big hit at a rate of 40% after the variable display ends and a special mini-character image that has a big hit at a rate of 70% after the variable display ends are stored.

  At the timing t4, a cut-in notice effect in which the cut-in image is cut in according to the operation of the player during the execution of the reach effect is executed. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type of cut-in image to be cut-in depending on whether or not a big hit occurs. A plurality of types of cut-in images to be displayed in the cut-in notice effect are stored, and each is selected so that the rate of a big hit after the variable display ends is different. For example, a normal cut-in image that has a big hit at a rate of 40% after the variable display ends and a special cut-in image that has a big hit at a rate of 70% after the variable display ends are stored.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the presence / absence of execution and the type of advance effect to be executed for each of the advance effects performed at each of the timings t1 to t4 by separate determination processing and selection processing. Therefore, when a big hit occurs after the end of the variable display, the ratio of the notification effect of the mode of the big hit that exceeds 50% among the types of the notification effects executed at the respective timings becomes higher. Therefore, the player plays the game paying attention to the appearance of the announcement effect in a mode of winning the jackpot at a rate exceeding 50%. In this control, the following control is performed to further improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where a big hit occurs after the end of the variable display, in the process of selecting a preview effect executed at any one of the timings t1 to t3, a preview effect of a mode in which the jackpot is obtained at a rate exceeding 50% is selected. In this case, at the timing after the timing, the restriction control is performed so that the announcement effect of the mode of winning the jackpot at a rate exceeding 50% is not selected. By doing so, after the announcement effect of the mode in which the jackpot is hit at a rate exceeding 50% is executed, the announcement effect of the mode of hitting the jackpot at a ratio exceeding 50% is not executed again, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is achieved. It becomes difficult for the player to make predictions.

  Note that the same effect can be obtained as the limit control by controlling not to execute the announcement effect of the mode of hitting the jackpot at a rate exceeding 50% but to make it difficult to execute. In addition, when there is a plurality of timings after the timing at which the notice effect of the mode of hitting the jackpot at a rate exceeding 50% is executed, the restriction control is performed for some or all of the plurality of timings. Good. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not to execute the limit control based on a notice effect in a mode in which a big hit occurs at a rate exceeding 50%. However, the standard as to whether or not to perform the limit control at each subsequent timing is determined for each timing. It may be different. Further, the reference for restricting the selection may be different for each timing.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is applicable to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each of a plurality of game media can simultaneously pass through a first starting area and a second starting area, and a first starting area And variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified based on the game medium having passed through at least one of the second starting area and the second starting area, and derives and displays the display result. The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine that controls a specific game state that is advantageous for a player when the specified display result is derived and displayed.

DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE NUMERALS 1 pachinko gaming machine 8a first special symbol display 8b second special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a first hold storage display portion 9b second hold storage display portion 9F predetermined effect execution area 13 first start winning opening 14 second Start winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 game control microcomputer 78 movable member 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Holding storage means for storing information relating to the variable display as holding storage;
A look-ahead notice that can execute a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice of the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state in response to the variable display based on the hold memory in a variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the hold memory. Production execution means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying in the variable display whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state in response to the variable display , and as the notification effect, a first notification effect and a first notification effect A notification effect execution means capable of executing a second notification effect having a high degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state ;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that the second notification effect is executed;
Holding display means for displaying a holding display corresponding to the holding storage ,
Before Symbol suggested demonstration execution means, whether or not the second notification effect is performed, and when performing the suggested effect, and when not performing the suggested effect, there is,
The hold display means,
When the first notification effect is executed, the non-display control of the hold display is not executed,
If the second notification effect is performed, executing a non-display control of hold display,
When the second notification effect is executed without executing the suggestion effect, non-display control of the hold display is performed with the start of the second notification effect, and display control of the hold display is performed with the end of the second notification effect. And
When the second notification effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed, the display of the hold display is controlled to non-display with the start of the suggestion effect, and the display of the hold display is controlled with the end of the second notification effect,
If the second notification effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed, non-display control is performed on the hold display with the start of the suggestion effect, and display control is performed on the hold display with the end of the suggestion effect,
The look-ahead notice effect execution means,
For the new hold storage stored during the execution of the non-display control, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the variable display in which the non-display control is executed, and the variable display in which the non-display control is executed ends. It is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect in a variable display executed later,
In a case where the prefetch notice effect is to be executed after the end of the variable display in which the non-display control has been executed, and when the advantageous state is controlled before the execution of the prefetch notice effect, the prefetch notice effect is performed. Do not run
The gaming machine which is characterized a call.

Images